1\input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*- 2@c Copyright (C) 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 3@c UPDATE!! On future updates-- 4@c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in 5@c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c 6@c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op 7@c in config/tc-*.c 8@c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op 9@c in config/obj-*.c 10@c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c 11@c %**start of header 12@setfilename as.info 13@c ---config--- 14@macro gcctabopt{body} 15@code{\body\} 16@end macro 17@c defaults, config file may override: 18@set have-stabs 19@c --- 20@c man begin NAME 21@c --- 22@include asconfig.texi 23@include bfdver.texi 24@c --- 25@c man end 26@c --- 27@c common OR combinations of conditions 28@ifset COFF 29@set COFF-ELF 30@end ifset 31@ifset ELF 32@set COFF-ELF 33@end ifset 34@ifset AOUT 35@set aout-bout 36@end ifset 37@ifset ARM/Thumb 38@set ARM 39@end ifset 40@ifset Blackfin 41@set Blackfin 42@end ifset 43@ifset BOUT 44@set aout-bout 45@end ifset 46@ifset H8/300 47@set H8 48@end ifset 49@ifset SH 50@set H8 51@end ifset 52@ifset HPPA 53@set abnormal-separator 54@end ifset 55@c ------------ 56@ifset GENERIC 57@settitle Using @value{AS} 58@end ifset 59@ifclear GENERIC 60@settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET}) 61@end ifclear 62@setchapternewpage odd 63@c %**end of header 64 65@c @smallbook 66@c @set SMALL 67@c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine 68@c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly. 69@c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so 70@c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections. 71@c 72@c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables, 73@c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on. 74@c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page 75@c break. 76@c 77@c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook, 78@c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you 79@c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the 80@c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your 81@c discretion, of course. 82@ifinfo 83@set SMALL 84@c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook, 85@c might as well show 'em anyways. 86@end ifinfo 87 88@ifnottex 89@dircategory Software development 90@direntry 91* As: (as). The GNU assembler. 92* Gas: (as). The GNU assembler. 93@end direntry 94@end ifnottex 95 96@finalout 97@syncodeindex ky cp 98 99@copying 100This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}". 101 102@c man begin COPYRIGHT 103Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 104 105Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document 106under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 107or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; 108with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no 109Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the 110section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''. 111 112@c man end 113@end copying 114 115@titlepage 116@title Using @value{AS} 117@subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler 118@ifclear GENERIC 119@subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family 120@end ifclear 121@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE 122@sp 1 123@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE} 124@end ifset 125@sp 1 126@subtitle Version @value{VERSION} 127@sp 1 128@sp 13 129The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer 130Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the 131first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}. 132The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for 133distracting the boss while they got some work 134done. 135@sp 3 136@author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends 137@page 138@tex 139{\parskip=0pt 140\hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par 141\hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par 142} 143%"boxit" macro for figures: 144%Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3) 145\gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt 146 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil 147#2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline 148\gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box 149@end tex 150 151@vskip 0pt plus 1filll 152Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 153 154 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document 155 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 156 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; 157 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no 158 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the 159 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''. 160 161@end titlepage 162@contents 163 164@ifnottex 165@node Top 166@top Using @value{AS} 167 168This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}} 169@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE 170@value{VERSION_PACKAGE} 171@end ifset 172version @value{VERSION}. 173@ifclear GENERIC 174This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate 175code for @value{TARGET} architectures. 176@end ifclear 177 178This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free 179Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the 180section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''. 181 182@menu 183* Overview:: Overview 184* Invoking:: Command-Line Options 185* Syntax:: Syntax 186* Sections:: Sections and Relocation 187* Symbols:: Symbols 188* Expressions:: Expressions 189* Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives 190@ifset ELF 191* Object Attributes:: Object Attributes 192@end ifset 193* Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features 194* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs 195* Acknowledgements:: Who Did What 196* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License 197* AS Index:: AS Index 198@end menu 199@end ifnottex 200 201@node Overview 202@chapter Overview 203@iftex 204This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}. 205@ifclear GENERIC 206This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate 207code for @value{TARGET} architectures. 208@end ifclear 209@end iftex 210 211@cindex invocation summary 212@cindex option summary 213@cindex summary of options 214Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details, 215see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}. 216 217@c man title AS the portable GNU assembler. 218 219@ignore 220@c man begin SEEALSO 221gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}. 222@c man end 223@end ignore 224 225@c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem 226@c to be limited to one line for the header. 227@smallexample 228@c man begin SYNOPSIS 229@value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}] 230 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}] 231 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}] 232 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}] 233 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}] 234 [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}] 235 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}] 236 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}] 237 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}] 238 [@b{--no-pad-sections}] 239 [@b{-o} @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}] 240 [@b{--hash-size}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}] 241 [@b{--statistics}] 242 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}] 243 [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}] [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}] 244 [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}] 245 [@b{--sectname-subst}] [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}] 246 [@b{--elf-stt-common=[no|yes]}] 247 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}] 248 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}] 249@c 250@c man end 251@c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted. 252@c Add an empty line for separation. 253@c man begin TARGET 254@ifset AARCH64 255 256@emph{Target AArch64 options:} 257 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}] 258 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] 259@end ifset 260@ifset ALPHA 261 262@emph{Target Alpha options:} 263 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}] 264 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}] 265 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}] 266 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}] 267 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}] 268@end ifset 269@ifset ARC 270 271@emph{Target ARC options:} 272 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] 273 [@b{-mA6}|@b{-mARC600}|@b{-mARC601}|@b{-mA7}|@b{-mARC700}|@b{-mEM}|@b{-mHS}] 274 [@b{-mcode-density}] 275 [@b{-mrelax}] 276 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}] 277@end ifset 278@ifset ARM 279 280@emph{Target ARM options:} 281@c Don't document the deprecated options 282 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]] 283 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]] 284 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}] 285 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}] 286 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}] 287 [@b{-mthumb}] 288 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}] 289 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}| 290 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}] 291 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}] 292@end ifset 293@ifset Blackfin 294 295@emph{Target Blackfin options:} 296 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]] 297 [@b{-mfdpic}] 298 [@b{-mno-fdpic}] 299 [@b{-mnopic}] 300@end ifset 301@ifset CRIS 302 303@emph{Target CRIS options:} 304 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}] 305 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}] 306 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}] 307 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}] 308@c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented. 309@c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}] 310@end ifset 311@ifset D10V 312 313@emph{Target D10V options:} 314 [@b{-O}] 315@end ifset 316@ifset D30V 317 318@emph{Target D30V options:} 319 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}] 320@end ifset 321@ifset EPIPHANY 322 323@emph{Target EPIPHANY options:} 324 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}] 325@end ifset 326@ifset H8 327 328@emph{Target H8/300 options:} 329 [-h-tick-hex] 330@end ifset 331@ifset HPPA 332@c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet). 333@end ifset 334@ifset I80386 335 336@emph{Target i386 options:} 337 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}] 338 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] 339@end ifset 340@ifset I960 341 342@emph{Target i960 options:} 343@c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c 344 [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}| 345 @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}] 346 [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}] 347@end ifset 348@ifset IA64 349 350@emph{Target IA-64 options:} 351 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}] 352 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}] 353 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}] 354 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}] 355 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}] 356 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}] 357 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}] 358@end ifset 359@ifset IP2K 360 361@emph{Target IP2K options:} 362 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}] 363@end ifset 364@ifset M32C 365 366@emph{Target M32C options:} 367 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex] 368@end ifset 369@ifset M32R 370 371@emph{Target M32R options:} 372 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}| 373 @b{--W[n]p}] 374@end ifset 375@ifset M680X0 376 377@emph{Target M680X0 options:} 378 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}] 379@end ifset 380@ifset M68HC11 381 382@emph{Target M68HC11 options:} 383 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}] 384 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}] 385 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}] 386 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}] 387 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}] 388 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}] 389@end ifset 390@ifset MCORE 391 392@emph{Target MCORE options:} 393 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}] 394 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}] 395@end ifset 396@ifset METAG 397 398@emph{Target Meta options:} 399 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}] 400@end ifset 401@ifset MICROBLAZE 402@emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:} 403@c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options. 404@end ifset 405@ifset MIPS 406 407@emph{Target MIPS options:} 408 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]] 409 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}] 410 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}] 411 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}] 412 [@b{-mfp64}] [@b{-mgp64}] [@b{-mfpxx}] 413 [@b{-modd-spreg}] [@b{-mno-odd-spreg}] 414 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}] 415 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}] 416 [@b{-mips32r3}] [@b{-mips32r5}] [@b{-mips32r6}] [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}] 417 [@b{-mips64r3}] [@b{-mips64r5}] [@b{-mips64r6}] 418 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}] 419 [@b{-mnan=@var{encoding}}] 420 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}] 421 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}] 422 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}] 423 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}] 424 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}] 425 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}] 426 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}] 427 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}] 428 [@b{-mdspr3}] [@b{-mno-dspr3}] 429 [@b{-mmsa}] [@b{-mno-msa}] 430 [@b{-mxpa}] [@b{-mno-xpa}] 431 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}] 432 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}] 433 [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}] 434 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}] 435 [@b{-mfix-rm7000}] [@b{-mno-fix-rm7000}] 436 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}] 437 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}] 438 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}] 439 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}] 440@end ifset 441@ifset MMIX 442 443@emph{Target MMIX options:} 444 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}] 445 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}] 446 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}] 447 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}] 448@end ifset 449@ifset NIOSII 450 451@emph{Target Nios II options:} 452 [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}] 453 [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}] 454@end ifset 455@ifset NDS32 456 457@emph{Target NDS32 options:} 458 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}] [@b{-Os}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] 459 [@b{-misa=@var{isa}}] [@b{-mabi=@var{abi}}] [@b{-mall-ext}] 460 [@b{-m[no-]16-bit}] [@b{-m[no-]perf-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]perf2-ext}] 461 [@b{-m[no-]string-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]dsp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]mac}] [@b{-m[no-]div}] 462 [@b{-m[no-]audio-isa-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext}] 463 [@b{-m[no-]fpu-fma}] [@b{-mfpu-freg=@var{FREG}}] [@b{-mreduced-regs}] 464 [@b{-mfull-regs}] [@b{-m[no-]dx-regs}] [@b{-mpic}] [@b{-mno-relax}] 465 [@b{-mb2bb}] 466@end ifset 467@ifset PDP11 468 469@emph{Target PDP11 options:} 470 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}] 471 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}] 472 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}] 473@end ifset 474@ifset PJ 475 476@emph{Target picoJava options:} 477 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}] 478@end ifset 479@ifset PPC 480 481@emph{Target PowerPC options:} 482 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}] 483 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}| 484 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}| 485 @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}| 486 @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}| 487 @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-mpower9}|@b{-mpwr9}@b{-ma2}| 488 @b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}] 489 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}] 490 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}] 491 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}] 492 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}] 493 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}] 494 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}] 495@end ifset 496@ifset RL78 497 498@emph{Target RL78 options:} 499 [@b{-mg10}] 500 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}] 501@end ifset 502@ifset RX 503 504@emph{Target RX options:} 505 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}] 506 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}] 507 [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}] 508 [@b{-msmall-data-limit}] 509 [@b{-mpid}] 510 [@b{-mrelax}] 511 [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}] 512 [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}] 513@end ifset 514@ifset S390 515 516@emph{Target s390 options:} 517 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] 518 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}] 519 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}] 520@end ifset 521@ifset SCORE 522 523@emph{Target SCORE options:} 524 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}] 525 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}] 526 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}] 527 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}] 528@end ifset 529@ifset SPARC 530 531@emph{Target SPARC options:} 532@c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi. 533 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite} 534 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}] 535 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}] [@b{-bump}] 536 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}] 537@end ifset 538@ifset TIC54X 539 540@emph{Target TIC54X options:} 541 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}] 542 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}] 543@end ifset 544@ifset TIC6X 545 546@emph{Target TIC6X options:} 547 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}] 548 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}] 549 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] 550@end ifset 551@ifset TILEGX 552 553@emph{Target TILE-Gx options:} 554 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}] 555@end ifset 556@ifset TILEPRO 557@c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options 558@end ifset 559@ifset VISIUM 560 561@emph{Target Visium options:} 562 [@b{-mtune=@var{arch}}] 563@end ifset 564@ifset XTENSA 565 566@emph{Target Xtensa options:} 567 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]auto-litpools}] 568 [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}] 569 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}] 570 [@b{--[no-]transform}] 571 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}] 572 [@b{--[no-]trampolines}] 573@end ifset 574@ifset Z80 575 576@emph{Target Z80 options:} 577 [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}] 578 [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}] 579 [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}] 580 [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}] 581 [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}] 582 [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}] 583 [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}] 584@end ifset 585@ifset Z8000 586 587@c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options 588@end ifset 589 590@c man end 591@end smallexample 592 593@c man begin OPTIONS 594 595@table @gcctabopt 596@include at-file.texi 597 598@item -a[cdghlmns] 599Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways: 600 601@table @gcctabopt 602@item -ac 603omit false conditionals 604 605@item -ad 606omit debugging directives 607 608@item -ag 609include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed 610 611@item -ah 612include high-level source 613 614@item -al 615include assembly 616 617@item -am 618include macro expansions 619 620@item -an 621omit forms processing 622 623@item -as 624include symbols 625 626@item =file 627set the name of the listing file 628@end table 629 630You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly 631listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be 632the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}. 633 634@item --alternate 635Begin in alternate macro mode. 636@ifclear man 637@xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}. 638@end ifclear 639 640@item --compress-debug-sections 641Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib with SHF_COMPRESSED from the 642ELF ABI. The resulting object file may not be compatible with older 643linkers and object file utilities. Note if compression would make a 644given section @emph{larger} then it is not compressed. 645 646@ifset ELF 647@cindex @samp{--compress-debug-sections=} option 648@item --compress-debug-sections=none 649@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib 650@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu 651@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi 652These options control how DWARF debug sections are compressed. 653@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} is equivalent to 654@option{--nocompress-debug-sections}. 655@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} and 656@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi} are equivalent to 657@option{--compress-debug-sections}. 658@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug 659sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed to begin with 660@samp{.zdebug}. Note if compression would make a given section 661@emph{larger} then it is not compressed nor renamed. 662 663@end ifset 664 665@item --nocompress-debug-sections 666Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is usually the default for all 667targets except the x86/x86_64, but a configure time option can be used to 668override this. 669 670@item -D 671Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to 672other assemblers. 673 674@item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new} 675When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging 676information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead. 677 678@item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value} 679Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file. 680@var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x} 681indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal 682value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the 683use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op. 684 685@item -f 686``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is 687compiler output). 688 689@item -g 690@itemx --gen-debug 691Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever 692debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS, 693ECOFF or DWARF2. 694 695@item --gstabs 696Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This 697may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. 698 699@item --gstabs+ 700Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU 701extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other 702debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This 703may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is 704the location of the current working directory at assembling time. 705 706@item --gdwarf-2 707Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This 708may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this 709option is only supported by some targets, not all of them. 710 711@item --gdwarf-sections 712Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of 713.debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the 714corresponding code section. For example a code section called @var{.text.func} 715will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called 716@var{.debug_line.text.func}. If the code section is just called @var{.text} 717then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any 718suffix. 719 720@ifset ELF 721@item --size-check=error 722@itemx --size-check=warning 723Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive. 724 725@item --elf-stt-common=no 726@itemx --elf-stt-common=yes 727These options control whether the ELF assembler should generate common 728symbols with the @code{STT_COMMON} type. The default can be controlled 729by a configure option @option{--enable-elf-stt-common}. 730@end ifset 731 732@item --help 733Print a summary of the command line options and exit. 734 735@item --target-help 736Print a summary of all target specific options and exit. 737 738@item -I @var{dir} 739Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives. 740 741@item -J 742Don't warn about signed overflow. 743 744@item -K 745@ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE 746This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family. 747@end ifclear 748@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE 749Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements. 750@end ifset 751 752@item -L 753@itemx --keep-locals 754Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with 755system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems 756or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems. 757@ifclear man 758@xref{Symbol Names}. 759@end ifclear 760 761@item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number} 762Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler 763listing to @var{number}. 764 765@item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number} 766Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation 767lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}. 768 769@item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number} 770Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to 771@var{number} bytes. 772 773@item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number} 774Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input 775to @var{number} + 1. 776 777@item --no-pad-sections 778Stop the assembler for padding the ends of output sections to the alignment 779of that section. The default is to pad the sections, but this can waste space 780which might be needed on targets which have tight memory constraints. 781 782@item -o @var{objfile} 783Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}. 784 785@item -R 786Fold the data section into the text section. 787 788@item --hash-size=@var{number} 789Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to 790@var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the 791assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's 792memory requirements. Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory 793requirements at the expense of speed. 794 795@item --reduce-memory-overheads 796This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the 797assembly processes slower. Currently this switch is a synonym for 798@samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well. 799 800@ifset ELF 801@item --sectname-subst 802Honor substitution sequences in section names. 803@ifclear man 804@xref{Section Name Substitutions,,@code{.section @var{name}}}. 805@end ifclear 806@end ifset 807 808@item --statistics 809Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by 810assembly. 811 812@item --strip-local-absolute 813Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table. 814 815@item -v 816@itemx -version 817Print the @command{as} version. 818 819@item --version 820Print the @command{as} version and exit. 821 822@item -W 823@itemx --no-warn 824Suppress warning messages. 825 826@item --fatal-warnings 827Treat warnings as errors. 828 829@item --warn 830Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors. 831 832@item -w 833Ignored. 834 835@item -x 836Ignored. 837 838@item -Z 839Generate an object file even after errors. 840 841@item -- | @var{files} @dots{} 842Standard input, or source files to assemble. 843 844@end table 845@c man end 846 847@ifset AARCH64 848 849@ifclear man 850@xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured 851for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64). 852@end ifclear 853 854@ifset man 855@c man begin OPTIONS 856The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 85764-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64). 858@c man end 859@c man begin INCLUDE 860@include c-aarch64.texi 861@c ended inside the included file 862@end ifset 863 864@end ifset 865 866@ifset ALPHA 867 868@ifclear man 869@xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured 870for an Alpha processor. 871@end ifclear 872 873@ifset man 874@c man begin OPTIONS 875The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha 876processor. 877@c man end 878@c man begin INCLUDE 879@include c-alpha.texi 880@c ended inside the included file 881@end ifset 882 883@end ifset 884 885@c man begin OPTIONS 886@ifset ARC 887The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an ARC 888processor. 889 890@table @gcctabopt 891@item -mcpu=@var{cpu} 892This option selects the core processor variant. 893@item -EB | -EL 894Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output. 895@item -mcode-density 896Enable Code Density extenssion instructions. 897@end table 898@end ifset 899 900@ifset ARM 901The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM 902processor family. 903 904@table @gcctabopt 905@item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}] 906Specify which ARM processor variant is the target. 907@item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}] 908Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target. 909@item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format} 910Select which Floating Point architecture is the target. 911@item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi} 912Select which floating point ABI is in use. 913@item -mthumb 914Enable Thumb only instruction decoding. 915@item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant 916Select which procedure calling convention is in use. 917@item -EB | -EL 918Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output. 919@item -mthumb-interwork 920Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and 921ARM code in mind. 922@item -mccs 923Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode. 924@item -k 925Specify that PIC code has been generated. 926@end table 927@end ifset 928@c man end 929 930@ifset Blackfin 931 932@ifclear man 933@xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is 934configured for the Blackfin processor family. 935@end ifclear 936 937@ifset man 938@c man begin OPTIONS 939The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for 940the Blackfin processor family. 941@c man end 942@c man begin INCLUDE 943@include c-bfin.texi 944@c ended inside the included file 945@end ifset 946 947@end ifset 948 949@c man begin OPTIONS 950@ifset CRIS 951See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options. 952@end ifset 953 954@ifset D10V 955The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for 956a D10V processor. 957@table @gcctabopt 958@cindex D10V optimization 959@cindex optimization, D10V 960@item -O 961Optimize output by parallelizing instructions. 962@end table 963@end ifset 964 965@ifset D30V 966The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V 967processor. 968@table @gcctabopt 969@cindex D30V optimization 970@cindex optimization, D30V 971@item -O 972Optimize output by parallelizing instructions. 973 974@cindex D30V nops 975@item -n 976Warn when nops are generated. 977 978@cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply 979@item -N 980Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated. 981@end table 982@end ifset 983@c man end 984 985@ifset EPIPHANY 986The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 987Adapteva EPIPHANY series. 988 989@ifclear man 990@xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is 991configured for an Epiphany processor. 992@end ifclear 993 994@ifset man 995@c man begin OPTIONS 996The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for 997an Epiphany processor. 998@c man end 999@c man begin INCLUDE 1000@include c-epiphany.texi 1001@c ended inside the included file 1002@end ifset 1003 1004@end ifset 1005 1006@ifset H8300 1007 1008@ifclear man 1009@xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured 1010for an H8/300 processor. 1011@end ifclear 1012 1013@ifset man 1014@c man begin OPTIONS 1015The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300 1016processor. 1017@c man end 1018@c man begin INCLUDE 1019@include c-h8300.texi 1020@c ended inside the included file 1021@end ifset 1022 1023@end ifset 1024 1025@ifset I80386 1026 1027@ifclear man 1028@xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is 1029configured for an i386 processor. 1030@end ifclear 1031 1032@ifset man 1033@c man begin OPTIONS 1034The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for 1035an i386 processor. 1036@c man end 1037@c man begin INCLUDE 1038@include c-i386.texi 1039@c ended inside the included file 1040@end ifset 1041 1042@end ifset 1043 1044@c man begin OPTIONS 1045@ifset I960 1046The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 1047Intel 80960 processor. 1048 1049@table @gcctabopt 1050@item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC 1051Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target. 1052 1053@item -b 1054Add code to collect statistics about branches taken. 1055 1056@item -no-relax 1057Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements; 1058error if necessary. 1059 1060@end table 1061@end ifset 1062 1063@ifset IP2K 1064The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 1065Ubicom IP2K series. 1066 1067@table @gcctabopt 1068 1069@item -mip2022ext 1070Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed. 1071 1072@item -mip2022 1073Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to 1074just the basic IP2022 ones. 1075 1076@end table 1077@end ifset 1078 1079@ifset M32C 1080The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 1081Renesas M32C and M16C processors. 1082 1083@table @gcctabopt 1084 1085@item -m32c 1086Assemble M32C instructions. 1087 1088@item -m16c 1089Assemble M16C instructions (the default). 1090 1091@item -relax 1092Enable support for link-time relaxations. 1093 1094@item -h-tick-hex 1095Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style. 1096 1097@end table 1098@end ifset 1099 1100@ifset M32R 1101The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 1102Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series. 1103 1104@table @gcctabopt 1105 1106@item --m32rx 1107Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default 1108is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX. 1109 1110@item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp 1111Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are 1112encountered. 1113 1114@item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp 1115Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are 1116encountered. 1117 1118@end table 1119@end ifset 1120 1121@ifset M680X0 1122The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 1123Motorola 68000 series. 1124 1125@table @gcctabopt 1126 1127@item -l 1128Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two. 1129 1130@item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030 1131@itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332 1132@itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200 1133Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default 1134is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time. 1135 1136@item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882 1137The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor. 1138The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although 1139the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the 1140two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the 1141coprocessor instructions with the main processor. 1142 1143@item -m68851 | -mno-68851 1144The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management 1145unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up. 1146 1147@end table 1148@end ifset 1149 1150@ifset NIOSII 1151 1152@ifclear man 1153@xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured 1154for an Altera Nios II processor. 1155@end ifclear 1156 1157@ifset man 1158@c man begin OPTIONS 1159The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an 1160Altera Nios II processor. 1161@c man end 1162@c man begin INCLUDE 1163@include c-nios2.texi 1164@c ended inside the included file 1165@end ifset 1166@end ifset 1167 1168@ifset PDP11 1169 1170For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options, 1171see @ref{PDP-11-Options}. 1172 1173@table @gcctabopt 1174@item -mpic | -mno-pic 1175Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The 1176default is @option{-mpic}. 1177 1178@item -mall 1179@itemx -mall-extensions 1180Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default. 1181 1182@item -mno-extensions 1183Disable all instruction set extensions. 1184 1185@item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension} 1186Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension. 1187 1188@item -m@var{cpu} 1189Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and 1190disable all other extensions. 1191 1192@item -m@var{machine} 1193Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine 1194model, and disable all other extensions. 1195@end table 1196 1197@end ifset 1198 1199@ifset PJ 1200The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for 1201a picoJava processor. 1202 1203@table @gcctabopt 1204 1205@cindex PJ endianness 1206@cindex endianness, PJ 1207@cindex big endian output, PJ 1208@item -mb 1209Generate ``big endian'' format output. 1210 1211@cindex little endian output, PJ 1212@item -ml 1213Generate ``little endian'' format output. 1214 1215@end table 1216@end ifset 1217 1218@ifset M68HC11 1219The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 1220Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series. 1221 1222@table @gcctabopt 1223 1224@item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg 1225Specify what processor is the target. The default is 1226defined by the configuration option when building the assembler. 1227 1228@item --xgate-ramoffset 1229Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into 1230XGATE address space. 1231 1232@item -mshort 1233Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI. 1234 1235@item -mlong 1236Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI. 1237 1238@item -mshort-double 1239Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI. 1240 1241@item -mlong-double 1242Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI. 1243 1244@item --force-long-branches 1245Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns 1246conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a 1247sub routine. 1248 1249@item -S | --short-branches 1250Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones 1251when the offset is out of range. 1252 1253@item --strict-direct-mode 1254Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode 1255when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode. 1256 1257@item --print-insn-syntax 1258Print the syntax of instruction in case of error. 1259 1260@item --print-opcodes 1261Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit. 1262 1263@item --generate-example 1264Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit. 1265This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}. 1266 1267@end table 1268@end ifset 1269 1270@ifset SPARC 1271The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured 1272for the SPARC architecture: 1273 1274@table @gcctabopt 1275@item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite 1276@itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a 1277Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture. 1278 1279@samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment. 1280@samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment. 1281 1282@samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with 1283UltraSPARC extensions. 1284 1285@item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa 1286For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are 1287equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively. 1288 1289@item -bump 1290Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture. 1291@end table 1292@end ifset 1293 1294@ifset TIC54X 1295The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x 1296architecture. 1297 1298@table @gcctabopt 1299@item -mfar-mode 1300Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume 1301extended addressing (usually 23 bits). 1302@item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION} 1303Sets the CPU version being compiled for. 1304@item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME} 1305Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such 1306behaviour in the shell. 1307@end table 1308@end ifset 1309 1310@ifset MIPS 1311The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for 1312a MIPS processor. 1313 1314@table @gcctabopt 1315@item -G @var{num} 1316This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced 1317implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that 1318use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8. 1319 1320@cindex MIPS endianness 1321@cindex endianness, MIPS 1322@cindex big endian output, MIPS 1323@item -EB 1324Generate ``big endian'' format output. 1325 1326@cindex little endian output, MIPS 1327@item -EL 1328Generate ``little endian'' format output. 1329 1330@cindex MIPS ISA 1331@item -mips1 1332@itemx -mips2 1333@itemx -mips3 1334@itemx -mips4 1335@itemx -mips5 1336@itemx -mips32 1337@itemx -mips32r2 1338@itemx -mips32r3 1339@itemx -mips32r5 1340@itemx -mips32r6 1341@itemx -mips64 1342@itemx -mips64r2 1343@itemx -mips64r3 1344@itemx -mips64r5 1345@itemx -mips64r6 1346Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level. 1347@samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an 1348alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for 1349@samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}. 1350@samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips32r3}, 1351@samp{-mips32r5}, @samp{-mips32r6}, @samp{-mips64}, @samp{-mips64r2}, 1352@samp{-mips64r3}, @samp{-mips64r5}, and @samp{-mips64r6} correspond to generic 1353MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2, MIPS32 Release 3, MIPS32 Release 5, MIPS32 1354Release 6, MIPS64, MIPS64 Release 2, MIPS64 Release 3, MIPS64 Release 5, and 1355MIPS64 Release 6 ISA processors, respectively. 1356 1357@item -march=@var{cpu} 1358Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU. 1359 1360@item -mtune=@var{cpu} 1361Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU. 1362 1363@item -mfix7000 1364@itemx -mno-fix7000 1365Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register 1366of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions. 1367 1368@item -mfix-rm7000 1369@itemx -mno-fix-rm7000 1370Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is 1371followed by a load instruction. 1372 1373@item -mdebug 1374@itemx -no-mdebug 1375Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug 1376section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections. 1377 1378@item -mpdr 1379@itemx -mno-pdr 1380Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections. 1381 1382@item -mgp32 1383@itemx -mfp32 1384The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these 1385flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at 1386all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers 1387and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers. 1388 1389@item -mgp64 1390@itemx -mfp64 1391The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these 1392flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 64 bits wide at 1393all times. @samp{-mgp64} controls the size of general-purpose registers 1394and @samp{-mfp64} controls the size of floating-point registers. 1395 1396@item -mfpxx 1397The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but using 1398this flag in combination with @samp{-mabi=32} enables an ABI variant 1399which will operate correctly with floating-point registers which are 140032 or 64 bits wide. 1401 1402@item -modd-spreg 1403@itemx -mno-odd-spreg 1404Enable use of floating-point operations on odd-numbered single-precision 1405registers when supported by the ISA. @samp{-mfpxx} implies 1406@samp{-mno-odd-spreg}, otherwise the default is @samp{-modd-spreg}. 1407 1408@item -mips16 1409@itemx -no-mips16 1410Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting 1411@code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16} 1412turns off this option. 1413 1414@item -mmicromips 1415@itemx -mno-micromips 1416Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting 1417@code{.set micromips} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-micromips} 1418turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set nomicromips} 1419at the start of the assembly file. 1420 1421@item -msmartmips 1422@itemx -mno-smartmips 1423Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is 1424equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file. 1425@samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option. 1426 1427@item -mips3d 1428@itemx -no-mips3d 1429Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension. 1430This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions. 1431@samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option. 1432 1433@item -mdmx 1434@itemx -no-mdmx 1435Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension. 1436This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions. 1437@samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option. 1438 1439@item -mdsp 1440@itemx -mno-dsp 1441Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension. 1442This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions. 1443@samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option. 1444 1445@item -mdspr2 1446@itemx -mno-dspr2 1447Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension. 1448This option implies @samp{-mdsp}. 1449This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions. 1450@samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option. 1451 1452@item -mdspr3 1453@itemx -mno-dspr3 1454Generate code for the DSP Release 3 Application Specific Extension. 1455This option implies @samp{-mdsp} and @samp{-mdspr2}. 1456This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 3 instructions. 1457@samp{-mno-dspr3} turns off this option. 1458 1459@item -mmsa 1460@itemx -mno-msa 1461Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension. 1462This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions. 1463@samp{-mno-msa} turns off this option. 1464 1465@item -mxpa 1466@itemx -mno-xpa 1467Generate code for the MIPS eXtended Physical Address (XPA) Extension. 1468This tells the assembler to accept XPA instructions. 1469@samp{-mno-xpa} turns off this option. 1470 1471@item -mmt 1472@itemx -mno-mt 1473Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension. 1474This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions. 1475@samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option. 1476 1477@item -mmcu 1478@itemx -mno-mcu 1479Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension. 1480This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions. 1481@samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option. 1482 1483@item -minsn32 1484@itemx -mno-insn32 1485Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the 1486microMIPS processor. This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit 1487instructions. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at 1488the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this 1489option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the 1490start of the assembly file. By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is 1491selected, allowing all instructions to be used. 1492 1493@item --construct-floats 1494@itemx --no-construct-floats 1495The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of 1496double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the 1497value into the two single width floating point registers that make up 1498the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is 1499selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants. 1500 1501@item --relax-branch 1502@itemx --no-relax-branch 1503The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range 1504branches. By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any 1505out-of-range branches to produce an error. 1506 1507@item -mnan=@var{encoding} 1508Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (@option{-mnan=2008}) or the legacy 1509(@option{-mnan=legacy}) NaN encoding format. The latter is the default. 1510 1511@cindex emulation 1512@item --emulation=@var{name} 1513This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output 1514on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both. MIPS ECOFF support was 1515removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose. 1516It is retained for backwards compatibility. 1517 1518The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and 1519@samp{mipsbelf}. Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output 1520is always ELF. @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and 1521big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the 1522preferred options instead. 1523 1524@item -nocpp 1525@command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with 1526the native tools. 1527 1528@item --trap 1529@itemx --no-trap 1530@itemx --break 1531@itemx --no-break 1532Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero. 1533@samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception 1534(and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher); 1535@samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a 1536break exception. 1537 1538@item -n 1539When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every 1540time it generates a nop instruction from a macro. 1541@end table 1542@end ifset 1543 1544@ifset MCORE 1545The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for 1546an MCore processor. 1547 1548@table @gcctabopt 1549@item -jsri2bsr 1550@itemx -nojsri2bsr 1551Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled. 1552The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it. 1553 1554@item -sifilter 1555@itemx -nosifilter 1556Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled. 1557The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option. 1558 1559@item -relax 1560Alter jump instructions for long displacements. 1561 1562@item -mcpu=[210|340] 1563Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions 1564can be assembled. 1565 1566@item -EB 1567Assemble for a big endian target. 1568 1569@item -EL 1570Assemble for a little endian target. 1571 1572@end table 1573@end ifset 1574@c man end 1575 1576@ifset METAG 1577 1578@ifclear man 1579@xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured 1580for a Meta processor. 1581@end ifclear 1582 1583@ifset man 1584@c man begin OPTIONS 1585The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a 1586Meta processor. 1587@c man end 1588@c man begin INCLUDE 1589@include c-metag.texi 1590@c ended inside the included file 1591@end ifset 1592 1593@end ifset 1594 1595@c man begin OPTIONS 1596@ifset MMIX 1597See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options. 1598@end ifset 1599 1600@ifset NDS32 1601 1602@ifclear man 1603@xref{NDS32 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured 1604for a NDS32 processor. 1605@end ifclear 1606@c ended inside the included file 1607@end ifset 1608 1609@ifset man 1610@c man begin OPTIONS 1611The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a 1612NDS32 processor. 1613@c man end 1614@c man begin INCLUDE 1615@include c-nds32.texi 1616@c ended inside the included file 1617@end ifset 1618 1619@c man end 1620@ifset PPC 1621 1622@ifclear man 1623@xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured 1624for a PowerPC processor. 1625@end ifclear 1626 1627@ifset man 1628@c man begin OPTIONS 1629The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a 1630PowerPC processor. 1631@c man end 1632@c man begin INCLUDE 1633@include c-ppc.texi 1634@c ended inside the included file 1635@end ifset 1636 1637@end ifset 1638 1639@c man begin OPTIONS 1640@ifset RX 1641See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options. 1642@end ifset 1643 1644@ifset S390 1645The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390 1646processor family. 1647 1648@table @gcctabopt 1649@item -m31 1650@itemx -m64 1651Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits. 1652@item -mesa 1653@item -mzarch 1654Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System 1655Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch). 1656@item -march=@var{processor} 1657Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g6}, @samp{g6}, 1658@samp{z900}, @samp{z990}, @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec}, @samp{z10}, 1659@samp{z196}, @samp{zEC12}, or @samp{z13}. 1660@item -mregnames 1661@itemx -mno-regnames 1662Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers. 1663@item -mwarn-areg-zero 1664Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified 1665but evaluates to zero. 1666@end table 1667@end ifset 1668@c man end 1669 1670@ifset TIC6X 1671 1672@ifclear man 1673@xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured 1674for a TMS320C6000 processor. 1675@end ifclear 1676 1677@ifset man 1678@c man begin OPTIONS 1679The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a 1680TMS320C6000 processor. 1681@c man end 1682@c man begin INCLUDE 1683@include c-tic6x.texi 1684@c ended inside the included file 1685@end ifset 1686 1687@end ifset 1688 1689@ifset TILEGX 1690 1691@ifclear man 1692@xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured 1693for a TILE-Gx processor. 1694@end ifclear 1695 1696@ifset man 1697@c man begin OPTIONS 1698The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx 1699processor. 1700@c man end 1701@c man begin INCLUDE 1702@include c-tilegx.texi 1703@c ended inside the included file 1704@end ifset 1705 1706@end ifset 1707 1708@ifset VISIUM 1709 1710@ifclear man 1711@xref{Visium Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured 1712for a Visium processor. 1713@end ifclear 1714 1715@ifset man 1716@c man begin OPTIONS 1717The following option is available when @value{AS} is configured for a Visium 1718processor. 1719@c man end 1720@c man begin INCLUDE 1721@include c-visium.texi 1722@c ended inside the included file 1723@end ifset 1724 1725@end ifset 1726 1727@ifset XTENSA 1728 1729@ifclear man 1730@xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured 1731for an Xtensa processor. 1732@end ifclear 1733 1734@ifset man 1735@c man begin OPTIONS 1736The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an 1737Xtensa processor. 1738@c man end 1739@c man begin INCLUDE 1740@include c-xtensa.texi 1741@c ended inside the included file 1742@end ifset 1743 1744@end ifset 1745 1746@c man begin OPTIONS 1747 1748@ifset Z80 1749The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for 1750a Z80 family processor. 1751@table @gcctabopt 1752@item -z80 1753Assemble for Z80 processor. 1754@item -r800 1755Assemble for R800 processor. 1756@item -ignore-undocumented-instructions 1757@itemx -Wnud 1758Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning. 1759@item -ignore-unportable-instructions 1760@itemx -Wnup 1761Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning. 1762@item -warn-undocumented-instructions 1763@itemx -Wud 1764Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800. 1765@item -warn-unportable-instructions 1766@itemx -Wup 1767Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800. 1768@item -forbid-undocumented-instructions 1769@itemx -Fud 1770Treat all undocumented instructions as errors. 1771@item -forbid-unportable-instructions 1772@itemx -Fup 1773Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors. 1774@end table 1775@end ifset 1776 1777@c man end 1778 1779@menu 1780* Manual:: Structure of this Manual 1781* GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler 1782* Object Formats:: Object File Formats 1783* Command Line:: Command Line 1784* Input Files:: Input Files 1785* Object:: Output (Object) File 1786* Errors:: Error and Warning Messages 1787@end menu 1788 1789@node Manual 1790@section Structure of this Manual 1791 1792@cindex manual, structure and purpose 1793This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use 1794@sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including 1795notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that 1796@command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. 1797 1798@ifclear GENERIC 1799We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET} 1800configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives. 1801@end ifclear 1802@ifset GENERIC 1803This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of 1804various flavors of the assembler. 1805@end ifset 1806 1807@cindex machine instructions (not covered) 1808On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction 1809to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general! 1810In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine 1811architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard 1812mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a 1813particular architecture. 1814@ifset GENERIC 1815You may want to consult the manufacturer's 1816machine architecture manual for this information. 1817@end ifset 1818@ifclear GENERIC 1819@ifset H8/300 1820For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300 1821Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series 1822Programming Manual} (Renesas). 1823@end ifset 1824@ifset SH 1825For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set, 1826see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or 1827@cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and 1828@cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH). 1829@end ifset 1830@ifset Z8000 1831For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual} 1832@end ifset 1833@end ifclear 1834 1835@c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991 1836@ignore 1837Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU}, 1838the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software 1839Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of 1840computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on); 1841once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less 1842qualification. 1843 1844@command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level 1845human-readable series of instructions into a low-level 1846computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of 1847@command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer. 1848@end ignore 1849 1850@c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined 1851@c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any 1852@c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16 1853@c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user 1854@c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define. 1855@c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual; 1856@c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of 1857@c directives). 1858 1859@node GNU Assembler 1860@section The GNU Assembler 1861 1862@c man begin DESCRIPTION 1863 1864@sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers. 1865@ifclear GENERIC 1866This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is 1867configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures. 1868@end ifclear 1869If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you 1870should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another 1871architecture. Each version has much in common with the others, 1872including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called 1873@dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill 1874 1875@cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler 1876@command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the 1877@sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker 1878@code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}} 1879assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same 1880machine would assemble. 1881@ifset VAX 1882Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}). 1883@end ifset 1884@ifset M680X0 1885@c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption 1886@c here is that generic version sets M680x0. 1887This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another 1888assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several 1889incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax. 1890@end ifset 1891 1892@c man end 1893 1894Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source 1895program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the 1896@kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}). 1897 1898@node Object Formats 1899@section Object File Formats 1900 1901@cindex object file format 1902The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative 1903object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you 1904write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols 1905are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol 1906Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}. 1907@ifclear GENERIC 1908@ifclear MULTI-OBJ 1909For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce 1910@value{OBJ-NAME} format object files. 1911@end ifclear 1912@c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally 1913@ifset I960 1914On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either 1915@code{b.out} or COFF format object files. 1916@end ifset 1917@ifset HPPA 1918On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either 1919SOM or ELF format object files. 1920@end ifset 1921@end ifclear 1922 1923@node Command Line 1924@section Command Line 1925 1926@cindex command line conventions 1927 1928After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain 1929options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be 1930before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is 1931significant. 1932 1933@cindex standard input, as input file 1934@kindex -- 1935@file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file 1936explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble. 1937 1938@cindex options, command line 1939Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a 1940hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of 1941@command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An 1942option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of 1943the letter is important. All options are optional. 1944 1945Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file 1946name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible 1947with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu} 1948standard). These two command lines are equivalent: 1949 1950@smallexample 1951@value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s 1952@value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s 1953@end smallexample 1954 1955@node Input Files 1956@section Input Files 1957 1958@cindex input 1959@cindex source program 1960@cindex files, input 1961We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to 1962describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may 1963be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files 1964doesn't change the meaning of the source. 1965 1966@c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my 1967@c APL training... doc@cygnus.com 1968The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the 1969order specified. 1970 1971@c man begin DESCRIPTION 1972Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source 1973program. The source program is made up of one or more files. 1974(The standard input is also a file.) 1975 1976You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file 1977names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A 1978command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning 1979is taken to be an input file name. 1980 1981If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file 1982from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You 1983may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program 1984to assemble. 1985 1986Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file 1987in your command line. 1988 1989If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object 1990file. 1991 1992@c man end 1993 1994@subheading Filenames and Line-numbers 1995 1996@cindex input file linenumbers 1997@cindex line numbers, in input files 1998There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and 1999either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line 2000number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a 2001``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}. 2002 2003@dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given 2004to @command{@value{AS}}. 2005 2006@dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler 2007directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help 2008error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source 2009is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the 2010@samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also 2011@ref{File,,@code{.file}}. 2012 2013@node Object 2014@section Output (Object) File 2015 2016@cindex object file 2017@cindex output file 2018@kindex a.out 2019@kindex .o 2020Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is 2021your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file 2022is the object file. Its default name is 2023@ifclear BOUT 2024@code{a.out}. 2025@end ifclear 2026@ifset BOUT 2027@ifset GENERIC 2028@code{a.out}, or 2029@end ifset 2030@code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960. 2031@end ifset 2032You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally, 2033object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical 2034reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs 2035directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently 2036possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.) 2037 2038@cindex linker 2039@kindex ld 2040The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains 2041assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate 2042the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic 2043information for the debugger. 2044 2045@c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out. 2046@c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage. 2047 2048@node Errors 2049@section Error and Warning Messages 2050 2051@c man begin DESCRIPTION 2052 2053@cindex error messages 2054@cindex warning messages 2055@cindex messages from assembler 2056@command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error 2057file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler 2058runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so 2059that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a 2060grave problem that stops the assembly. 2061 2062@c man end 2063 2064@cindex format of warning messages 2065Warning messages have the format 2066 2067@smallexample 2068file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text 2069@end smallexample 2070 2071@noindent 2072@cindex file names and line numbers, in warnings/errors 2073(where @b{NNN} is a line number). If both a logical file name 2074(@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) and a logical line number 2075@ifset GENERIC 2076(@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}}) 2077@end ifset 2078have been given then they will be used, otherwise the file name and line number 2079in the current assembler source file will be used. The message text is 2080intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix tradition). 2081 2082Note the file name must be set via the logical version of the @code{.file} 2083directive, not the DWARF2 version of the @code{.file} directive. For example: 2084 2085@smallexample 2086 .file 2 "bar.c" 2087 error_assembler_source 2088 .file "foo.c" 2089 .line 30 2090 error_c_source 2091@end smallexample 2092 2093produces this output: 2094 2095@smallexample 2096 Assembler messages: 2097 asm.s:2: Error: no such instruction: `error_assembler_source' 2098 foo.c:31: Error: no such instruction: `error_c_source' 2099@end smallexample 2100 2101@cindex format of error messages 2102Error messages have the format 2103 2104@smallexample 2105file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text 2106@end smallexample 2107 2108The file name and line number are derived as for warning 2109messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory 2110because many of them aren't supposed to happen. 2111 2112@node Invoking 2113@chapter Command-Line Options 2114 2115@cindex options, all versions of assembler 2116This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all} 2117versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies}, 2118for options specific 2119@ifclear GENERIC 2120to the @value{TARGET} target. 2121@end ifclear 2122@ifset GENERIC 2123to particular machine architectures. 2124@end ifset 2125 2126@c man begin DESCRIPTION 2127 2128If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler, 2129you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler. 2130The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa}) 2131by commas. For example: 2132 2133@smallexample 2134gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c 2135@end smallexample 2136 2137@noindent 2138This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to 2139standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain 2140local symbols in the symbol table). 2141 2142Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler 2143command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler. 2144(You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see 2145precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the 2146assembler.) 2147 2148@c man end 2149 2150@menu 2151* a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings 2152* alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax 2153* D:: -D for compatibility 2154* f:: -f to work faster 2155* I:: -I for .include search path 2156@ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE 2157* K:: -K for compatibility 2158@end ifclear 2159@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE 2160* K:: -K for difference tables 2161@end ifset 2162 2163* L:: -L to retain local symbols 2164* listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output 2165* M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode 2166* MD:: --MD for dependency tracking 2167* no-pad-sections:: --no-pad-sections to stop section padding 2168* o:: -o to name the object file 2169* R:: -R to join data and text sections 2170* statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly 2171* traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output 2172* v:: -v to announce version 2173* W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings 2174* Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors 2175@end menu 2176 2177@node a 2178@section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]} 2179 2180@kindex -a 2181@kindex -ac 2182@kindex -ad 2183@kindex -ag 2184@kindex -ah 2185@kindex -al 2186@kindex -an 2187@kindex -as 2188@cindex listings, enabling 2189@cindex assembly listings, enabling 2190 2191These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself, 2192@samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing. 2193You can use other letters to select specific options for the list: 2194@samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing, 2195@samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and 2196@samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing. 2197High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like 2198@samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested 2199also. 2200 2201Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly 2202information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp. 2203 2204Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines 2205which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any 2206other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be 2207omitted from the listing. 2208 2209Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the 2210listing. 2211 2212Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control 2213listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list}, 2214@code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and 2215@code{.sbttl}. 2216The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing. 2217If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the 2218listing-control directives have no effect. 2219 2220The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option, 2221@emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}. 2222 2223Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g., 2224because it 2225is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch 2226is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor 2227directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from 2228stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces 2229memory usage and makes the code more efficient. 2230 2231@node alternate 2232@section @option{--alternate} 2233 2234@kindex --alternate 2235Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}. 2236 2237@node D 2238@section @option{-D} 2239 2240@kindex -D 2241This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more 2242likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with 2243@command{@value{AS}}. 2244 2245@node f 2246@section Work Faster: @option{-f} 2247 2248@kindex -f 2249@cindex trusted compiler 2250@cindex faster processing (@option{-f}) 2251@samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a 2252(trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace 2253and comment preprocessing on 2254the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing, 2255,Preprocessing}. 2256 2257@quotation 2258@emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be 2259preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does 2260not work correctly. 2261@end quotation 2262 2263@node I 2264@section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path} 2265 2266@kindex -I @var{path} 2267@cindex paths for @code{.include} 2268@cindex search path for @code{.include} 2269@cindex @code{include} directive search path 2270Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories 2271@command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include} 2272directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as 2273many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current 2274working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}} 2275searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were 2276specified (left to right) on the command line. 2277 2278@node K 2279@section Difference Tables: @option{-K} 2280 2281@kindex -K 2282@ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE 2283On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is 2284permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms, 2285where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code 2286generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET} 2287family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this 2288alteration on other platforms. 2289@end ifclear 2290 2291@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE 2292@cindex difference tables, warning 2293@cindex warning for altered difference tables 2294@command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the 2295form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}. 2296You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this 2297is done. 2298@end ifset 2299 2300@node L 2301@section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L} 2302 2303@kindex -L 2304@cindex local symbols, retaining in output 2305Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically 2306@samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are 2307called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see 2308such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of 2309programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your 2310notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard 2311such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them. 2312 2313This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols 2314in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker 2315@code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols. 2316 2317@node listing 2318@section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing} 2319 2320The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch 2321@samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a 2322hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays 2323them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by 2324directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}), 2325@code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}), 2326@code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and 2327@code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches: 2328 2329@table @gcctabopt 2330@item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number} 2331@kindex --listing-lhs-width 2332@cindex Width of first line disassembly output 2333Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This 2334dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output. 2335 2336@item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number} 2337@kindex --listing-lhs-width2 2338@cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output 2339Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for 2340a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being 2341the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither 2342switch is used the default is to one. 2343 2344@item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number} 2345@kindex --listing-rhs-width 2346@cindex Width of source line output 2347Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed 2348alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The 2349source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output. 2350 2351@item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number} 2352@kindex --listing-cont-lines 2353@cindex Maximum number of continuation lines 2354Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be 2355displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4. 2356@end table 2357 2358@node M 2359@section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M} 2360 2361@kindex -M 2362@cindex MRI compatibility mode 2363The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This 2364changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it 2365compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the 2366configured target) assembler from Microtec Research. The exact nature of the 2367MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more 2368information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro 2369arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit 2370assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}. 2371 2372The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler 2373depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object 2374file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format 2375individually. These are: 2376 2377@itemize @bullet 2378@item global symbols in common section 2379 2380The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker. 2381Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles 2382common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local 2383symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global 2384symbols, since it has no way to describe them. 2385 2386@item complex relocations 2387 2388The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and 2389relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These 2390are not support by other object file formats. 2391 2392@item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address 2393 2394The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address. 2395This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may 2396instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker 2397script. 2398 2399@item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops 2400 2401The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module 2402name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats. 2403 2404@item @code{ORG} pseudo-op 2405 2406The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given 2407address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op, 2408which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are 2409not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be 2410assigned within a linker script. 2411@end itemize 2412 2413There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by 2414@command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they 2415seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases. 2416 2417@itemize @bullet 2418 2419@item EBCDIC strings 2420 2421EBCDIC strings are not supported. 2422 2423@item packed binary coded decimal 2424 2425Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P} 2426and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported. 2427 2428@item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op 2429 2430The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported. 2431 2432@item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op 2433 2434The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported. 2435 2436@item @code{OPT} branch control options 2437 2438The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB}, 2439@code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically 2440relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so 2441these options serve no purpose. 2442 2443@item @code{OPT} list control options 2444 2445The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C}, 2446@code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M}, 2447@code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}. 2448 2449@item other @code{OPT} options 2450 2451The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O}, 2452@code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}. 2453 2454@item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default 2455 2456The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler. 2457@code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off. 2458 2459@item @code{XREF} pseudo-op. 2460 2461The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored. 2462 2463@item @code{.debug} pseudo-op 2464 2465The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported. 2466 2467@item @code{.extended} pseudo-op 2468 2469The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported. 2470 2471@item @code{.list} pseudo-op. 2472 2473The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported. 2474 2475@item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op 2476 2477The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported. 2478 2479@item @code{.output} pseudo-op 2480 2481The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported. 2482 2483@item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op 2484 2485The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported. 2486 2487@end itemize 2488 2489@node MD 2490@section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD} 2491 2492@kindex --MD 2493@cindex dependency tracking 2494@cindex make rules 2495 2496@command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This 2497file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the 2498dependencies of the main source file. 2499 2500The rule is written to the file named in its argument. 2501 2502This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles. 2503 2504@node no-pad-sections 2505@section Output Section Padding 2506@kindex --no-pad-sections 2507@cindex output section padding 2508Normally the assembler will pad the end of each output section up to its 2509alignment boundary. But this can waste space, which can be significant on 2510memory constrained targets. So the @option{--no-pad-sections} option will 2511disable this behaviour. 2512 2513@node o 2514@section Name the Object File: @option{-o} 2515 2516@kindex -o 2517@cindex naming object file 2518@cindex object file name 2519There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By 2520default it has the name 2521@ifset GENERIC 2522@ifset I960 2523@file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only). 2524@end ifset 2525@ifclear I960 2526@file{a.out}. 2527@end ifclear 2528@end ifset 2529@ifclear GENERIC 2530@ifset I960 2531@file{b.out}. 2532@end ifset 2533@ifclear I960 2534@file{a.out}. 2535@end ifclear 2536@end ifclear 2537You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the 2538object file a different name. 2539 2540Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any 2541existing file of the same name. 2542 2543@node R 2544@section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R} 2545 2546@kindex -R 2547@cindex data and text sections, joining 2548@cindex text and data sections, joining 2549@cindex joining text and data sections 2550@cindex merging text and data sections 2551@option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all 2552data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at 2553the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data 2554section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of 2555your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are 2556appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.) 2557 2558When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter 2559address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and 2560data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with 2561older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way. 2562 2563@ifset COFF-ELF 2564When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output, 2565this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and 2566@samp{.data}. 2567@end ifset 2568 2569@ifset HPPA 2570@option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using 2571@option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}. 2572@end ifset 2573 2574@node statistics 2575@section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics} 2576 2577@kindex --statistics 2578@cindex statistics, about assembly 2579@cindex time, total for assembly 2580@cindex space used, maximum for assembly 2581Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by 2582@command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly 2583(in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu} 2584seconds). 2585 2586@node traditional-format 2587@section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format} 2588 2589@kindex --traditional-format 2590For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways 2591from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests 2592@command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead. 2593 2594For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which 2595@command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output. 2596 2597@node v 2598@section Announce Version: @option{-v} 2599 2600@kindex -v 2601@kindex -version 2602@cindex assembler version 2603@cindex version of assembler 2604You can find out what version of as is running by including the 2605option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the 2606command line. 2607 2608@node W 2609@section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings} 2610 2611@command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when 2612assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often 2613cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was 2614made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file. 2615 2616@kindex -W 2617@kindex --no-warn 2618@cindex suppressing warnings 2619@cindex warnings, suppressing 2620If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued. 2621This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of 2622how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly, 2623are still reported. 2624 2625@kindex --fatal-warnings 2626@cindex errors, caused by warnings 2627@cindex warnings, causing error 2628If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers 2629files that generate warnings to be in error. 2630 2631@kindex --warn 2632@cindex warnings, switching on 2633You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which 2634causes warnings to be output as usual. 2635 2636@node Z 2637@section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z} 2638@cindex object file, after errors 2639@cindex errors, continuing after 2640After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for 2641some reason you are interested in object file output even after 2642@command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z} 2643option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and 2644writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n} 2645errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.} 2646 2647@node Syntax 2648@chapter Syntax 2649 2650@cindex machine-independent syntax 2651@cindex syntax, machine-independent 2652This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a 2653source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other 2654assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2 2655@ifclear VAX 2656assembler. 2657@end ifclear 2658@ifset VAX 2659assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields. 2660@end ifset 2661 2662@menu 2663* Preprocessing:: Preprocessing 2664* Whitespace:: Whitespace 2665* Comments:: Comments 2666* Symbol Intro:: Symbols 2667* Statements:: Statements 2668* Constants:: Constants 2669@end menu 2670 2671@node Preprocessing 2672@section Preprocessing 2673 2674@cindex preprocessing 2675The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor: 2676@itemize @bullet 2677@cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor 2678@item 2679adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before 2680the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into 2681a single space. 2682 2683@cindex comments, removed by preprocessor 2684@item 2685removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an 2686appropriate number of newlines. 2687 2688@cindex constants, converted by preprocessor 2689@item 2690converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values. 2691@end itemize 2692 2693It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or 2694anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can 2695do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive 2696(@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver 2697to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a 2698@samp{.S} suffix. @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of 2699Output, gcc info, Using GNU CC}. 2700 2701Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants 2702cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not 2703preprocessed. 2704 2705@cindex turning preprocessing on and off 2706@cindex preprocessing, turning on and off 2707@kindex #NO_APP 2708@kindex #APP 2709If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the 2710@samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file. 2711Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in 2712specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the 2713text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says 2714@code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support 2715@code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments 2716and whitespace. 2717 2718@node Whitespace 2719@section Whitespace 2720 2721@cindex whitespace 2722@dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order. 2723Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for 2724people to read. Unless within character constants 2725(@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same 2726as exactly one space. 2727 2728@node Comments 2729@section Comments 2730 2731@cindex comments 2732There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both 2733cases the comment is equivalent to one space. 2734 2735Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment. 2736This means you may not nest these comments. 2737 2738@smallexample 2739/* 2740 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment 2741 is to use this sort of comment. 2742*/ 2743 2744/* This sort of comment does not nest. */ 2745@end smallexample 2746 2747@cindex line comment character 2748Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is 2749considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target 2750specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have 2751line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a 2752line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line 2753comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending 2754upon command line options that have been used. For more details see the 2755@emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets. 2756 2757If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the 2758special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and 2759to specify logical line numbers: 2760 2761@kindex # 2762@cindex lines starting with @code{#} 2763@cindex logical line numbers 2764To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a 2765special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute 2766expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next} 2767line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a 2768new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace. 2769 2770If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric, 2771the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.) 2772 2773@smallexample 2774 # This is an ordinary comment. 2775# 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name 2776 # This is logical line # 36. 2777@end smallexample 2778This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions 2779of @command{@value{AS}}. 2780 2781@node Symbol Intro 2782@section Symbols 2783 2784@cindex characters used in symbols 2785@ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS 2786A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all 2787letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters 2788@samp{_.$}. 2789@end ifclear 2790@ifset SPECIAL-SYMS 2791@ifclear GENERIC 2792@ifset H8 2793A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all 2794letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters 2795@samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in 2796symbol names.) 2797@end ifset 2798@end ifclear 2799@end ifset 2800@ifset GENERIC 2801On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions 2802are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. 2803@end ifset 2804No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant. 2805There is no length limit; all characters are significant. Multibyte characters 2806are supported. Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the 2807beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end 2808of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}. 2809 2810Symbol names may also be enclosed in double quote @code{"} characters. In such 2811cases any characters are allowed, except for the NUL character. If a double 2812quote character is to be included in the symbol name it must be preceeded by a 2813backslash @code{\} character. 2814@cindex length of symbols 2815 2816@node Statements 2817@section Statements 2818 2819@cindex statements, structure of 2820@cindex line separator character 2821@cindex statement separator character 2822 2823A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a 2824@dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target 2825specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each 2826target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character. 2827The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the 2828preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an 2829exception: they do not end statements. 2830 2831@cindex newline, required at file end 2832@cindex EOF, newline must precede 2833It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last 2834character of any input file should be a newline.@refill 2835 2836An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored. 2837 2838@cindex instructions and directives 2839@cindex directives and instructions 2840@c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to 2841@c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com, 2842@c 13feb91. 2843A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a 2844key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key 2845symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the 2846symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler 2847directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with 2848a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it 2849assembles into a machine language instruction. 2850@ifset GENERIC 2851Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers 2852recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may 2853represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly 2854language.@refill 2855@end ifset 2856 2857@cindex @code{:} (label) 2858@cindex label (@code{:}) 2859A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}). 2860Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not 2861have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}. 2862 2863@ifset HPPA 2864For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but 2865the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that 2866only one label may be defined on each line. 2867@end ifset 2868 2869@smallexample 2870label: .directive followed by something 2871another_label: # This is an empty statement. 2872 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{} 2873@end smallexample 2874 2875@node Constants 2876@section Constants 2877 2878@cindex constants 2879A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by 2880inspection, without knowing any context. Like this: 2881@smallexample 2882@group 2883.byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value. 2884.ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant. 2885.octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum. 2886.float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\ 288795028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum. 2888@end group 2889@end smallexample 2890 2891@menu 2892* Characters:: Character Constants 2893* Numbers:: Number Constants 2894@end menu 2895 2896@node Characters 2897@subsection Character Constants 2898 2899@cindex character constants 2900@cindex constants, character 2901There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands 2902for one character in one byte and its value may be used in 2903numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string 2904@emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be 2905used in arithmetic expressions. 2906 2907@menu 2908* Strings:: Strings 2909* Chars:: Characters 2910@end menu 2911 2912@node Strings 2913@subsubsection Strings 2914 2915@cindex string constants 2916@cindex constants, string 2917A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain 2918double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters 2919into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with 2920a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents 2921one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells 2922@command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash 2923(which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an 2924escape character). The complete list of escapes follows. 2925 2926@cindex escape codes, character 2927@cindex character escape codes 2928@c NOTE: Cindex entries must not start with a backlash character. 2929@c NOTE: This confuses the pdf2texi script when it is creating the 2930@c NOTE: index based upon the first character and so it generates: 2931@c NOTE: \initial {\\} 2932@c NOTE: which then results in the error message: 2933@c NOTE: Argument of \\ has an extra }. 2934@c NOTE: So in the index entries below a space character has been 2935@c NOTE: prepended to avoid this problem. 2936@table @kbd 2937@c @item \a 2938@c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007. 2939@c 2940@cindex @code{ \b} (backspace character) 2941@cindex backspace (@code{\b}) 2942@item \b 2943Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010. 2944 2945@c @item \e 2946@c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004. 2947@c 2948@cindex @code{ \f} (formfeed character) 2949@cindex formfeed (@code{\f}) 2950@item backslash-f 2951Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014. 2952 2953@cindex @code{ \n} (newline character) 2954@cindex newline (@code{\n}) 2955@item \n 2956Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012. 2957 2958@c @item \p 2959@c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}. 2960@c 2961@cindex @code{ \r} (carriage return character) 2962@cindex carriage return (@code{backslash-r}) 2963@item \r 2964Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015. 2965 2966@c @item \s 2967@c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with 2968@c other assemblers. 2969@c 2970@cindex @code{ \t} (tab) 2971@cindex tab (@code{\t}) 2972@item \t 2973Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011. 2974 2975@c @item \v 2976@c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013. 2977@c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit} 2978@c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits. 2979@c 2980@cindex @code{ \@var{ddd}} (octal character code) 2981@cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}}) 2982@item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit} 2983An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits. 2984For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits: 2985for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011. 2986 2987@cindex @code{ \@var{xd...}} (hex character code) 2988@cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}}) 2989@item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...} 2990A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or 2991lower case @code{x} works. 2992 2993@cindex @code{ \\} (@samp{\} character) 2994@cindex backslash (@code{\\}) 2995@item \\ 2996Represents one @samp{\} character. 2997 2998@c @item \' 2999@c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character. 3000@c This is needed in single character literals 3001@c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent 3002@c a @samp{'}. 3003@c 3004@cindex @code{ \"} (doublequote character) 3005@cindex doublequote (@code{\"}) 3006@item \" 3007Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent 3008this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string. 3009 3010@item \ @var{anything-else} 3011Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but 3012assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if 3013you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal 3014interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no 3015other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong 3016code and warns you of the fact. 3017@end table 3018 3019Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent, 3020varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think 3021the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C 3022compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape 3023sequence. 3024 3025@node Chars 3026@subsubsection Characters 3027 3028@cindex single character constant 3029@cindex character, single 3030@cindex constant, single character 3031A single character may be written as a single quote immediately 3032followed by that character. The same escapes apply to characters as 3033to strings. So if you want to write the character backslash, you 3034must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes the second 3035@code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a 3036grave accent. A newline 3037@ifclear GENERIC 3038@ifclear abnormal-separator 3039(or semicolon @samp{;}) 3040@end ifclear 3041@ifset abnormal-separator 3042@ifset H8 3043(or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the 3044Renesas SH) 3045@end ifset 3046@end ifset 3047@end ifclear 3048immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character 3049and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character 3050constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for 3051that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII: 3052@kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill 3053 3054@node Numbers 3055@subsection Number Constants 3056 3057@cindex constants, number 3058@cindex number constants 3059@command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they 3060are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that 3061would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are 3062integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums} 3063are floating point numbers, described below. 3064 3065@menu 3066* Integers:: Integers 3067* Bignums:: Bignums 3068* Flonums:: Flonums 3069@ifclear GENERIC 3070@ifset I960 3071* Bit Fields:: Bit Fields 3072@end ifset 3073@end ifclear 3074@end menu 3075 3076@node Integers 3077@subsubsection Integers 3078@cindex integers 3079@cindex constants, integer 3080 3081@cindex binary integers 3082@cindex integers, binary 3083A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of 3084the binary digits @samp{01}. 3085 3086@cindex octal integers 3087@cindex integers, octal 3088An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal 3089digits (@samp{01234567}). 3090 3091@cindex decimal integers 3092@cindex integers, decimal 3093A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or 3094more digits (@samp{0123456789}). 3095 3096@cindex hexadecimal integers 3097@cindex integers, hexadecimal 3098A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or 3099more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}. 3100 3101Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use 3102the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions 3103(@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}). 3104 3105@node Bignums 3106@subsubsection Bignums 3107 3108@cindex bignums 3109@cindex constants, bignum 3110A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer 3111except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to 3112represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places 3113integers are permitted while bignums are not. 3114 3115@node Flonums 3116@subsubsection Flonums 3117@cindex flonums 3118@cindex floating point numbers 3119@cindex constants, floating point 3120 3121@cindex precision, floating point 3122A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is 3123indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by 3124@command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than 3125sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted 3126to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a 3127portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer. 3128 3129A flonum is written by writing (in order) 3130@itemize @bullet 3131@item 3132The digit @samp{0}. 3133@ifset HPPA 3134(@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.) 3135@end ifset 3136 3137@item 3138A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum. 3139@ifset GENERIC 3140@kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important. 3141@ignore 3142@c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases 3143(Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD 31444.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.) 3145@end ignore 3146 3147On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH, 3148and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be 3149one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case). 3150 3151On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS} 3152(in upper or lower case). 3153 3154On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be 3155one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case). 3156 3157On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only). 3158@end ifset 3159@ifclear GENERIC 3160@ifset ARC 3161One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case). 3162@end ifset 3163@ifset H8 3164One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case). 3165@end ifset 3166@ifset HPPA 3167The letter @samp{E} (upper case only). 3168@end ifset 3169@ifset I960 3170One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case). 3171@end ifset 3172@end ifclear 3173 3174@item 3175An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}. 3176 3177@item 3178An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits. 3179 3180@item 3181An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero 3182or more decimal digits. 3183 3184@item 3185An optional exponent, consisting of: 3186 3187@itemize @bullet 3188@item 3189An @samp{E} or @samp{e}. 3190@c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in 3191@c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets. 3192@item 3193Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}. 3194@item 3195One or more decimal digits. 3196@end itemize 3197 3198@end itemize 3199 3200At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be 3201present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value. 3202 3203@command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed 3204independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running 3205@command{@value{AS}}. 3206 3207@ifclear GENERIC 3208@ifset I960 3209@c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled 3210@c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91) 3211@c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS. 3212@node Bit Fields 3213@subsubsection Bit Fields 3214 3215@cindex bit fields 3216@cindex constants, bit field 3217You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}. 3218Specify two numbers separated by a colon--- 3219@example 3220@var{mask}:@var{value} 3221@end example 3222@noindent 3223@command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and 3224@var{value}. 3225 3226The resulting number is then packed 3227@ifset GENERIC 3228@c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960 3229(in host-dependent byte order) 3230@end ifset 3231into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the 3232bit-field as its argument. Overflow (a result from the bitwise and 3233requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead, 3234more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the 3235least significant digits.@refill 3236 3237The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long}, 3238@code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments. 3239@end ifset 3240@end ifclear 3241 3242@node Sections 3243@chapter Sections and Relocation 3244@cindex sections 3245@cindex relocation 3246 3247@menu 3248* Secs Background:: Background 3249* Ld Sections:: Linker Sections 3250* As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections 3251* Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections 3252* bss:: bss Section 3253@end menu 3254 3255@node Secs Background 3256@section Background 3257 3258Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data 3259``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose. 3260For example there may be a ``read only'' section. 3261 3262@cindex linker, and assembler 3263@cindex assembler, and linker 3264The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and 3265combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}} 3266emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0. 3267@code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that 3268different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an 3269oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses 3270sections. 3271 3272@code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time 3273addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid 3274units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes 3275within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning 3276run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes 3277the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to 3278the proper run-time addresses. 3279@ifset H8 3280For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH, 3281@command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to 3282ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary. 3283@end ifset 3284 3285@cindex standard assembler sections 3286An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any 3287of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and 3288@dfn{bss} sections. 3289 3290@ifset COFF-ELF 3291@ifset GENERIC 3292When it generates COFF or ELF output, 3293@end ifset 3294@command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify 3295using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}). 3296If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text} 3297or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty. 3298@end ifset 3299 3300@ifset HPPA 3301@ifset GENERIC 3302When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA, 3303@end ifset 3304@command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you 3305specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See 3306@cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual} 3307(HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} 3308assembler directives. 3309 3310@ifset SOM 3311Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard 3312text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text 3313is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and 3314BSS into @samp{$BSS$}. 3315@end ifset 3316@end ifset 3317 3318Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the 3319data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section. 3320 3321@ifset HPPA 3322When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text 3323section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address 3324@code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section. 3325@end ifset 3326 3327To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are 3328relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the 3329object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation 3330@code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object 3331file is mentioned: 3332@itemize @bullet 3333@item 3334Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to 3335an address? 3336@item 3337How long (in bytes) is this reference? 3338@item 3339Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of 3340@display 3341(@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})? 3342@end display 3343@item 3344Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''? 3345@end itemize 3346 3347@cindex addresses, format of 3348@cindex section-relative addressing 3349In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as 3350@display 3351(@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section}) 3352@end display 3353@noindent 3354Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative 3355nature. 3356@ifset SOM 3357(For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are 3358symbol-relative instead.) 3359@end ifset 3360 3361In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset 3362@var{N} into section @var{secname}.'' 3363 3364Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the 3365@dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs, 3366addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address 3367@code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by 3368@code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs' 3369data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition} 3370their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one 3371part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as 3372address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program. 3373 3374The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any 3375address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition 3376rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later. 3377Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined 3378address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named 3379common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly 3380time so it has section @emph{undefined}. 3381 3382By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in 3383the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text 3384sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is 3385customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all 3386the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for 3387data and bss sections. 3388 3389Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for 3390use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly. 3391 3392@node Ld Sections 3393@section Linker Sections 3394@code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below. 3395 3396@table @strong 3397 3398@ifset COFF-ELF 3399@cindex named sections 3400@cindex sections, named 3401@item named sections 3402@end ifset 3403@ifset aout-bout 3404@cindex text section 3405@cindex data section 3406@itemx text section 3407@itemx data section 3408@end ifset 3409These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as 3410separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is 3411true of another. 3412@c @ifset aout-bout 3413When the program is running, however, it is 3414customary for the text section to be unalterable. The 3415text section is often shared among processes: it contains 3416instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running 3417program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored 3418in the data section. 3419@c @end ifset 3420 3421@cindex bss section 3422@item bss section 3423This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It 3424is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of 3425each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts 3426out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero 3427bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate 3428those explicit zeros from object files. 3429 3430@cindex absolute section 3431@item absolute section 3432Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0. 3433This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must 3434not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute 3435addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation. 3436 3437@cindex undefined section 3438@item undefined section 3439This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in 3440the preceding sections. 3441@c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here. 3442@end table 3443 3444@cindex relocation example 3445An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows. 3446@ifset COFF-ELF 3447The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}. 3448@end ifset 3449Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis. 3450 3451@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL 3452@ifnottex 3453@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL 3454@smallexample 3455 +-----+----+--+ 3456partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00| 3457 +-----+----+--+ 3458 3459 text data bss 3460 seg. seg. seg. 3461 3462 +---+---+---+ 3463partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000| 3464 +---+---+---+ 3465 3466 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~ 3467linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000| 3468 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~ 3469 3470 addresses: 0 @dots{} 3471@end smallexample 3472@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL 3473@end ifnottex 3474@need 5000 3475@tex 3476\bigskip 3477\line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil} 3478\line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil} 3479\line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil} 3480 3481\line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil} 3482\line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil} 3483\line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil} 3484 3485\line{\it linked program: \hfil} 3486\line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil} 3487\line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt 3488ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt 3489DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil} 3490 3491\line{\it addresses: \hfil} 3492\line{0\dots\hfil} 3493 3494@end tex 3495@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL 3496 3497@node As Sections 3498@section Assembler Internal Sections 3499 3500@cindex internal assembler sections 3501@cindex sections in messages, internal 3502These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They 3503have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these 3504sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}} 3505warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their 3506meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the 3507value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a 3508section-relative address. 3509 3510@table @b 3511@cindex assembler internal logic error 3512@item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR! 3513An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a 3514bug in the assembler. 3515 3516@cindex expr (internal section) 3517@item expr section 3518The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of 3519symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts 3520it in the expr section. 3521@c FIXME item debug 3522@c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload 3523@c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload 3524@c FIXME item register 3525@end table 3526 3527@node Sub-Sections 3528@section Sub-Sections 3529 3530@cindex numbered subsections 3531@cindex grouping data 3532@ifset aout-bout 3533Assembled bytes 3534@ifset COFF-ELF 3535conventionally 3536@end ifset 3537fall into two sections: text and data. 3538@end ifset 3539You may have separate groups of 3540@ifset GENERIC 3541data in named sections 3542@end ifset 3543@ifclear GENERIC 3544@ifclear aout-bout 3545data in named sections 3546@end ifclear 3547@ifset aout-bout 3548text or data 3549@end ifset 3550@end ifclear 3551that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they 3552are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to 3553use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be 3554numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the 3555same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same 3556subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text 3557section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being 3558assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each 3559section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of 3560constants being output. 3561 3562Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything 3563goes in subsection number zero. 3564 3565@ifset GENERIC 3566Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes. 3567(Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors 3568of @command{@value{AS}}.) 3569@end ifset 3570@ifclear GENERIC 3571@ifset H8 3572On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word 3573boundary (two bytes). 3574The same is true on the Renesas SH. 3575@end ifset 3576@ifset I960 3577@c FIXME section padding (alignment)? 3578@c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that 3579@c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration, 3580@c so for now I say nothing about it. If this is a generic BFD issue, 3581@c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be 3582@c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such). 3583@end ifset 3584@end ifclear 3585 3586Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered 3587to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.) 3588The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and 3589other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them. 3590They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your 3591data subsections as a data section. 3592 3593To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled 3594into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text 3595@var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement. 3596@ifset COFF 3597@ifset GENERIC 3598When generating COFF output, you 3599@end ifset 3600@ifclear GENERIC 3601You 3602@end ifclear 3603can also use an extra subsection 3604argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name}, 3605@var{expression}}. 3606@end ifset 3607@ifset ELF 3608@ifset GENERIC 3609When generating ELF output, you 3610@end ifset 3611@ifclear GENERIC 3612You 3613@end ifclear 3614can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection}) 3615to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}. 3616@end ifset 3617@var{Expression} should be an absolute expression 3618(@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0} 3619is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly 3620begins in @code{text 0}. For instance: 3621@smallexample 3622.text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway. 3623.ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *" 3624.text 1 3625.ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection." 3626.data 0 3627.ascii "This lives in the data section," 3628.ascii "in the first data subsection." 3629.text 0 3630.ascii "This lives in the first text section," 3631.ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)." 3632@end smallexample 3633 3634Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte 3635assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience 3636restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location 3637counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the 3638@code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its 3639current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being 3640assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter. 3641 3642@node bss 3643@section bss Section 3644 3645@cindex bss section 3646@cindex common variable storage 3647The bss section is used for local common variable storage. 3648You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may 3649not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When 3650your program starts running, all the contents of the bss 3651section are zeroed bytes. 3652 3653The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see 3654@ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}. 3655 3656The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is 3657another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}. 3658 3659@ifset GENERIC 3660When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or 3661COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual; 3662see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the 3663section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and 3664@code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}). 3665@end ifset 3666 3667@node Symbols 3668@chapter Symbols 3669 3670@cindex symbols 3671Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name 3672things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols 3673to debug. 3674 3675@quotation 3676@cindex debuggers, and symbol order 3677@emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in 3678the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers. 3679@end quotation 3680 3681@menu 3682* Labels:: Labels 3683* Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values 3684* Symbol Names:: Symbol Names 3685* Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol 3686* Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes 3687@end menu 3688 3689@node Labels 3690@section Labels 3691 3692@cindex labels 3693A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon 3694@samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the 3695active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction 3696operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two 3697different locations: the first definition overrides any other 3698definitions. 3699 3700@ifset HPPA 3701On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a 3702colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on 3703a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also 3704provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly. 3705@end ifset 3706 3707@node Setting Symbols 3708@section Giving Symbols Other Values 3709 3710@cindex assigning values to symbols 3711@cindex symbol values, assigning 3712A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed 3713by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression 3714(@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set} 3715directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double 3716equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the 3717@code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}. 3718 3719@ifset Blackfin 3720Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}. 3721@end ifset 3722 3723@node Symbol Names 3724@section Symbol Names 3725 3726@cindex symbol names 3727@cindex names, symbol 3728@ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS 3729Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most 3730machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are 3731noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any 3732string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a 3733particular target machine), and underscores. 3734@end ifclear 3735@ifset SPECIAL-SYMS 3736@ifset H8 3737Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the 3738Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That 3739character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save 3740on the H8/300), and underscores. 3741@end ifset 3742@end ifset 3743 3744Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name 3745than @code{Foo}. 3746 3747Symbol names do not start with a digit. An exception to this rule is made for 3748Local Labels. See below. 3749 3750Multibyte characters are supported. To generate a symbol name containing 3751multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf 3752@xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not 3753currently supported. 3754 3755Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program 3756refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times 3757in a program. 3758 3759@subheading Local Symbol Names 3760 3761@cindex local symbol names 3762@cindex symbol names, local 3763A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes. 3764By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or 3765@samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own 3766set of local label prefixes. 3767@ifset HPPA 3768On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}. 3769@end ifset 3770 3771Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are 3772normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging. 3773You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols}) 3774to retain the local symbols in the object files. 3775 3776@subheading Local Labels 3777 3778@cindex local labels 3779@cindex temporary symbol names 3780@cindex symbol names, temporary 3781Local labels are different from local symbols. Local labels help compilers and 3782programmers use names temporarily. They create symbols which are guaranteed to 3783be unique over the entire scope of the input source code and which can be 3784referred to by a simple notation. To define a local label, write a label of 3785the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N} represents any non-negative integer). 3786To refer to the most recent previous definition of that label write 3787@samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when you defined the label. To refer 3788to the next definition of a local label, write @samp{@b{N}f}. The @samp{b} 3789stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands for ``forwards''. 3790 3791There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them 3792too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using 3793the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently 3794defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next 3795definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth 3796noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are 3797implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others. 3798 3799Here is an example: 3800 3801@smallexample 38021: branch 1f 38032: branch 1b 38041: branch 2f 38052: branch 1b 3806@end smallexample 3807 3808Which is the equivalent of: 3809 3810@smallexample 3811label_1: branch label_3 3812label_2: branch label_1 3813label_3: branch label_4 3814label_4: branch label_3 3815@end smallexample 3816 3817Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately 3818transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them. 3819The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and 3820are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using 3821these parts: 3822 3823@table @code 3824@item @emph{local label prefix} 3825All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix. 3826Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols 3827that start with the local label prefix. These labels are 3828used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the 3829@samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the 3830object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols, 3831you may use them in debugging. 3832 3833@item @var{number} 3834This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the 3835label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}. 3836 3837@item @kbd{C-B} 3838This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol 3839of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B). 3840 3841@item @emph{ordinal number} 3842This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of 3843@samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the 3844number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets 3845the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well. 3846@end table 3847 3848So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and 3849the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}. 3850 3851@subheading Dollar Local Labels 3852@cindex dollar local symbols 3853 3854On some targets @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of 3855local labels called dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they 3856become undefined) as soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain 3857valid for only a small region of the input source code. Normal local labels, 3858by contrast, remain in scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined 3859by another occurrence of the same local label. 3860 3861Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels, 3862except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g., 3863@samp{@b{55$:}}. 3864 3865They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed 3866names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character 3867to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of 3868@samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}. 3869 3870@node Dot 3871@section The Special Dot Symbol 3872 3873@cindex dot (symbol) 3874@cindex @code{.} (symbol) 3875@cindex current address 3876@cindex location counter 3877The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that 3878@command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin: 3879.long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address. 3880Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org} 3881directive. 3882@ifclear no-space-dir 3883Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying 3884@samp{.space 4}. 3885@end ifclear 3886 3887@node Symbol Attributes 3888@section Symbol Attributes 3889 3890@cindex symbol attributes 3891@cindex attributes, symbol 3892Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and 3893``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary 3894attributes. 3895@ifset INTERNALS 3896The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}. 3897@end ifset 3898 3899If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for 3900all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the 3901symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you 3902would want. 3903 3904@menu 3905* Symbol Value:: Value 3906* Symbol Type:: Type 3907@ifset aout-bout 3908@ifset GENERIC 3909* a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out} 3910@end ifset 3911@ifclear GENERIC 3912@ifclear BOUT 3913* a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out} 3914@end ifclear 3915@ifset BOUT 3916* a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out} 3917@end ifset 3918@end ifclear 3919@end ifset 3920@ifset COFF 3921* COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF 3922@end ifset 3923@ifset SOM 3924* SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM 3925@end ifset 3926@end menu 3927 3928@node Symbol Value 3929@subsection Value 3930 3931@cindex value of a symbol 3932@cindex symbol value 3933The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a 3934location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the 3935number of addresses from the start of that section to the label. 3936Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes 3937as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute 3938symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are 3939called absolute. 3940 3941The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is 39420 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and 3943@code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the 3944same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol 3945name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm} 3946common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in 3947bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the 3948allocated storage. 3949 3950@node Symbol Type 3951@subsection Type 3952 3953@cindex type of a symbol 3954@cindex symbol type 3955The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section) 3956information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and 3957(optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact 3958format depends on the object-code output format in use. 3959 3960@ifset aout-bout 3961@ifclear GENERIC 3962@ifset BOUT 3963@c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title. @group would be 3964@c better if it were available outside examples. 3965@need 1000 3966@node a.out Symbols 3967@subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out} 3968 3969@cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes 3970@cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out} 3971These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for 3972one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or 3973@code{b.out}. 3974 3975@end ifset 3976@ifclear BOUT 3977@node a.out Symbols 3978@subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out} 3979 3980@cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes 3981@cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out} 3982 3983@end ifclear 3984@end ifclear 3985@ifset GENERIC 3986@node a.out Symbols 3987@subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out} 3988 3989@cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes 3990@cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out} 3991 3992@end ifset 3993@menu 3994* Symbol Desc:: Descriptor 3995* Symbol Other:: Other 3996@end menu 3997 3998@node Symbol Desc 3999@subsubsection Descriptor 4000 4001@cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol 4002This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's 4003descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement 4004(@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to 4005@command{@value{AS}}. 4006 4007@node Symbol Other 4008@subsubsection Other 4009 4010@cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol 4011This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}. 4012@end ifset 4013 4014@ifset COFF 4015@node COFF Symbols 4016@subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF 4017 4018@cindex COFF symbol attributes 4019@cindex symbol attributes, COFF 4020 4021The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes; 4022like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and 4023@code{.endef} directives. 4024 4025@subsubsection Primary Attributes 4026 4027@cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols 4028The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type, 4029respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}. 4030 4031@subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes 4032 4033@cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols 4034The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl}, 4035@code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol 4036table information for COFF. 4037@end ifset 4038 4039@ifset SOM 4040@node SOM Symbols 4041@subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM 4042 4043@cindex SOM symbol attributes 4044@cindex symbol attributes, SOM 4045 4046The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with 4047the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives. 4048 4049The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly 4050Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and 4051@code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation. 4052@end ifset 4053 4054@node Expressions 4055@chapter Expressions 4056 4057@cindex expressions 4058@cindex addresses 4059@cindex numeric values 4060An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value. 4061Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression. 4062 4063The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into 4064a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not 4065enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its 4066section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret 4067the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented. 4068@command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation. 4069 4070@menu 4071* Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions 4072* Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions 4073@end menu 4074 4075@node Empty Exprs 4076@section Empty Expressions 4077 4078@cindex empty expressions 4079@cindex expressions, empty 4080An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null. 4081Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the 4082expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This 4083is compatible with other assemblers. 4084 4085@node Integer Exprs 4086@section Integer Expressions 4087 4088@cindex integer expressions 4089@cindex expressions, integer 4090An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited 4091by @emph{operators}. 4092 4093@menu 4094* Arguments:: Arguments 4095* Operators:: Operators 4096* Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators 4097* Infix Ops:: Infix Operators 4098@end menu 4099 4100@node Arguments 4101@subsection Arguments 4102 4103@cindex expression arguments 4104@cindex arguments in expressions 4105@cindex operands in expressions 4106@cindex arithmetic operands 4107@dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other 4108contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In 4109this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of 4110the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of 4111expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine 4112instruction operands. 4113 4114Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where 4115@var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute, 4116or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit 4117integer. 4118 4119Numbers are usually integers. 4120 4121A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned 4122that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends 4123these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating 4124instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other 4125assemblers. 4126 4127@cindex subexpressions 4128Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer 4129expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix 4130operator followed by an argument. 4131 4132@node Operators 4133@subsection Operators 4134 4135@cindex operators, in expressions 4136@cindex arithmetic functions 4137@cindex functions, in expressions 4138@dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix 4139operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear 4140between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by 4141whitespace. 4142 4143@node Prefix Ops 4144@subsection Prefix Operator 4145 4146@cindex prefix operators 4147@command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take 4148one argument, which must be absolute. 4149 4150@c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make 4151@c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next 4152@c section (which is inside an enumerate). 4153@tex 4154\global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent 4155@end tex 4156 4157@table @code 4158@item - 4159@dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation. 4160@item ~ 4161@dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not. 4162@end table 4163 4164@tex 4165\global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent 4166@end tex 4167 4168@node Infix Ops 4169@subsection Infix Operators 4170 4171@cindex infix operators 4172@cindex operators, permitted arguments 4173@dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators 4174have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left 4175to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be 4176absolute, and the result is absolute. 4177 4178@enumerate 4179@cindex operator precedence 4180@cindex precedence of operators 4181 4182@item 4183Highest Precedence 4184 4185@table @code 4186@item * 4187@dfn{Multiplication}. 4188 4189@item / 4190@dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/} 4191 4192@item % 4193@dfn{Remainder}. 4194 4195@item << 4196@dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}. 4197 4198@item >> 4199@dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}. 4200@end table 4201 4202@item 4203Intermediate precedence 4204 4205@table @code 4206@item | 4207 4208@dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}. 4209 4210@item & 4211@dfn{Bitwise And}. 4212 4213@item ^ 4214@dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}. 4215 4216@item ! 4217@dfn{Bitwise Or Not}. 4218@end table 4219 4220@item 4221Low Precedence 4222 4223@table @code 4224@cindex addition, permitted arguments 4225@cindex plus, permitted arguments 4226@cindex arguments for addition 4227@item + 4228@dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of 4229the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different 4230sections. 4231 4232@cindex subtraction, permitted arguments 4233@cindex minus, permitted arguments 4234@cindex arguments for subtraction 4235@item - 4236@dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the 4237result has the section of the left argument. 4238If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute. 4239You may not subtract arguments from different sections. 4240@c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ? 4241 4242@cindex comparison expressions 4243@cindex expressions, comparison 4244@item == 4245@dfn{Is Equal To} 4246@item <> 4247@itemx != 4248@dfn{Is Not Equal To} 4249@item < 4250@dfn{Is Less Than} 4251@item > 4252@dfn{Is Greater Than} 4253@item >= 4254@dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To} 4255@item <= 4256@dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To} 4257 4258The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a 4259value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators 4260perform signed comparisons. 4261@end table 4262 4263@item Lowest Precedence 4264 4265@table @code 4266@item && 4267@dfn{Logical And}. 4268 4269@item || 4270@dfn{Logical Or}. 4271 4272These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub 4273expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a 4274value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical 4275or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and. 4276 4277@end table 4278@end enumerate 4279 4280In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an 4281address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments. 4282 4283@node Pseudo Ops 4284@chapter Assembler Directives 4285 4286@cindex directives, machine independent 4287@cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent 4288@cindex machine independent directives 4289All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}). 4290The names are case insensitive for most targets, and usually written 4291in lower case. 4292 4293This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the 4294target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler. 4295@ifset GENERIC 4296Some machine configurations provide additional directives. 4297@xref{Machine Dependencies}. 4298@end ifset 4299@ifclear GENERIC 4300@ifset machine-directives 4301@xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives. 4302@end ifset 4303@end ifclear 4304 4305@menu 4306* Abort:: @code{.abort} 4307@ifset COFF 4308* ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT} 4309@end ifset 4310 4311* Align:: @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}} 4312* Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro} 4313* Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{} 4314* Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{} 4315* Balign:: @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}} 4316* Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, etc 4317* Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}} 4318* CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc. 4319* Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} } 4320* Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}} 4321@ifset COFF 4322* Def:: @code{.def @var{name}} 4323@end ifset 4324@ifset aout-bout 4325* Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}} 4326@end ifset 4327@ifset COFF 4328* Dim:: @code{.dim} 4329@end ifset 4330 4331* Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}} 4332* Eject:: @code{.eject} 4333* Else:: @code{.else} 4334* Elseif:: @code{.elseif} 4335* End:: @code{.end} 4336@ifset COFF 4337* Endef:: @code{.endef} 4338@end ifset 4339 4340* Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc} 4341* Endif:: @code{.endif} 4342* Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}} 4343* Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}} 4344* Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}} 4345* Err:: @code{.err} 4346* Error:: @code{.error @var{string}} 4347* Exitm:: @code{.exitm} 4348* Extern:: @code{.extern} 4349* Fail:: @code{.fail} 4350* File:: @code{.file} 4351* Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}} 4352* Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}} 4353* Func:: @code{.func} 4354* Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}} 4355@ifset ELF 4356* Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}} 4357* Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}} 4358@end ifset 4359 4360* hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}} 4361* Ident:: @code{.ident} 4362* If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}} 4363* Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]} 4364* Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"} 4365* Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}} 4366@ifset ELF 4367* Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}} 4368@end ifset 4369 4370* Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{} 4371* Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{} 4372* Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}} 4373* Lflags:: @code{.lflags} 4374@ifclear no-line-dir 4375* Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}} 4376@end ifclear 4377 4378* Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]} 4379* List:: @code{.list} 4380* Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}} 4381* Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}} 4382* Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}} 4383@ifset ELF 4384* Local:: @code{.local @var{names}} 4385@end ifset 4386 4387* Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}} 4388@ignore 4389* Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}} 4390@end ignore 4391 4392* Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{} 4393* MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}} 4394* Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro} 4395* Nolist:: @code{.nolist} 4396* Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}} 4397* Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}} 4398* Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}} 4399* P2align:: @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}} 4400@ifset ELF 4401* PopSection:: @code{.popsection} 4402* Previous:: @code{.previous} 4403@end ifset 4404 4405* Print:: @code{.print @var{string}} 4406@ifset ELF 4407* Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}} 4408@end ifset 4409 4410* Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}} 4411* Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}} 4412@ifset ELF 4413* PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}} 4414@end ifset 4415 4416* Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}} 4417* Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]} 4418* Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}} 4419* Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"} 4420@ifset COFF 4421* Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}} 4422@end ifset 4423@ifset COFF-ELF 4424* Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]} 4425@end ifset 4426 4427* Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}} 4428* Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}} 4429* Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}} 4430@ifset COFF-ELF 4431* Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]} 4432@end ifset 4433@ifclear no-space-dir 4434* Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}} 4435@end ifclear 4436 4437* Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}} 4438@ifclear no-space-dir 4439* Space:: @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}} 4440@end ifclear 4441@ifset have-stabs 4442* Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs} 4443@end ifset 4444 4445* String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"} 4446* Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}} 4447@ifset ELF 4448* SubSection:: @code{.subsection} 4449* Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}} 4450@end ifset 4451 4452@ifset COFF 4453* Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}} 4454@end ifset 4455 4456* Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}} 4457* Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"} 4458@ifset COFF-ELF 4459* Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>} 4460@end ifset 4461 4462* Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}} 4463@ifset COFF 4464* Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}} 4465@end ifset 4466 4467@ifset ELF 4468* Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"} 4469* VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}} 4470* VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}} 4471@end ifset 4472 4473* Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}} 4474* Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}} 4475* Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}} 4476* Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}} 4477@ifclear no-space-dir 4478* Zero:: @code{.zero @var{size}} 4479@end ifclear 4480* Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives 4481@end menu 4482 4483@node Abort 4484@section @code{.abort} 4485 4486@cindex @code{abort} directive 4487@cindex stopping the assembly 4488This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for 4489compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the 4490assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender 4491of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to 4492quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported. 4493 4494@ifset COFF 4495@node ABORT (COFF) 4496@section @code{.ABORT} (COFF) 4497 4498@cindex @code{ABORT} directive 4499When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a 4500synonym for @samp{.abort}. 4501 4502@ifset BOUT 4503When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, 4504but ignores it. 4505@end ifset 4506@end ifset 4507 4508@node Align 4509@section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}} 4510 4511@cindex padding the location counter 4512@cindex @code{align} directive 4513Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage 4514boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment 4515required, as described below. 4516 4517The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the 4518padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the 4519padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is 4520marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled 4521with no-op instructions. 4522 4523The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present, 4524it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment 4525directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the 4526specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the 4527fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the 4528required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled 4529with no-op instructions when appropriate. 4530 4531The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system. 4532For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or1k, 4533s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the 4534alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances 4535the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter 4536is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the 4537first expression is the alignment request in words. 4538 4539For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and 4540strongarm, it is the 4541number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after 4542advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location 4543counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a 4544multiple of 8, no change is needed. 4545 4546This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various 4547native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate. 4548GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives, 4549described later, which have a consistent behavior across all 4550architectures (but are specific to GAS). 4551 4552@node Altmacro 4553@section @code{.altmacro} 4554Enable alternate macro mode, enabling: 4555 4556@ftable @code 4557@item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ] 4558One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to 4559generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and 4560replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The 4561replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each 4562separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that 4563define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions. 4564 4565@item String delimiters 4566You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides 4567@code{"@var{string}"}: 4568 4569@table @code 4570@item '@var{string}' 4571You can delimit strings with single-quote characters. 4572 4573@item <@var{string}> 4574You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets. 4575@end table 4576 4577@item single-character string escape 4578To include any single character literally in a string (even if the 4579character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the 4580character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can 4581write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}. 4582 4583@item Expression results as strings 4584You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr} 4585and use the result as a string. 4586@end ftable 4587 4588@node Ascii 4589@section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{} 4590 4591@cindex @code{ascii} directive 4592@cindex string literals 4593@code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings}) 4594separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic 4595trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses. 4596 4597@node Asciz 4598@section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{} 4599 4600@cindex @code{asciz} directive 4601@cindex zero-terminated strings 4602@cindex null-terminated strings 4603@code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by 4604a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''. 4605 4606@node Balign 4607@section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}} 4608 4609@cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes 4610@cindex @code{balign} directive 4611Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular 4612storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the 4613alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances 4614the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter 4615is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. 4616 4617The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the 4618padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the 4619padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is 4620marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled 4621with no-op instructions. 4622 4623The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present, 4624it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment 4625directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the 4626specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the 4627fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the 4628required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled 4629with no-op instructions when appropriate. 4630 4631@cindex @code{balignw} directive 4632@cindex @code{balignl} directive 4633The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the 4634@code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill 4635pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the 4636fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw 46374,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be 4638filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon 4639the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is 4640undefined. 4641 4642@node Bundle directives 4643@section Bundle directives 4644@subsection @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}} 4645@cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive 4646@cindex bundle 4647@cindex instruction bundle 4648@cindex aligned instruction bundle 4649@code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction 4650bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped 4651into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is 4652disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it 4653gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the 4654@code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}). 4655 4656For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a 4657certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of 4658instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if 4659@var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned 4660chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in 4661effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an 4662instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of 4663that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the 4664end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction 4665starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single 4666instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size. 4667 4668@subsection @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} 4669@cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive 4670@cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive 4671The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives 4672allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives 4673are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable 4674aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when 4675@code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last 4676directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}. 4677 4678@cindex bundle-locked 4679For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may 4680appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple 4681instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock} 4682and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked} 4683instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a 4684sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with 4685@code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the 4686entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle 4687boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the 4688first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an 4689aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the 4690bundle size. 4691 4692For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} 4693inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be 4694nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next 4695@code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be 4696matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the 4697same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives. 4698 4699@node Byte 4700@section @code{.byte @var{expressions}} 4701 4702@cindex @code{byte} directive 4703@cindex integers, one byte 4704@code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas. 4705Each expression is assembled into the next byte. 4706 4707@node CFI directives 4708@section CFI directives 4709@subsection @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}} 4710@cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive 4711@code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives 4712should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section. 4713If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted, 4714if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted. 4715To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this 4716directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}. 4717 4718On targets that support compact unwinding tables these can be generated 4719by specifying @code{.eh_frame_entry} instead of @code{.eh_frame}. 4720 4721Some targets may support an additional name, such as @code{.c6xabi.exidx} 4722which is used by the @value{TIC6X} target. 4723 4724The @code{.cfi_sections} directive can be repeated, with the same or different 4725arguments, provided that CFI generation has not yet started. Once CFI 4726generation has started however the section list is fixed and any attempts to 4727redefine it will result in an error. 4728 4729@subsection @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]} 4730@cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive 4731@code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that 4732should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal 4733data structures. Don't forget to close the function by 4734@code{.cfi_endproc}. 4735 4736Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple} 4737it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions. 4738 4739@subsection @code{.cfi_endproc} 4740@cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive 4741@code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its 4742unwind entry previously opened by 4743@code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}. 4744 4745@subsection @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]} 4746@cindex @code{cfi_personality} directive 4747@code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding. 4748@var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality 4749should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second 4750argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be 4751a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings, 4752the symbol provided should be the location where personality 4753can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself. 4754The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff}, 4755no personality routine. 4756 4757@subsection @code{.cfi_personality_id @var{id}} 4758@cindex @code{cfi_personality_id} directive 4759@code{cfi_personality_id} defines a personality routine by its index as 4760defined in a compact unwinding format. 4761Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e. 4762with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}. 4763 4764@subsection @code{.cfi_fde_data [@var{opcode1} [, @dots{}]]} 4765@cindex @code{cfi_fde_data} directive 4766@code{cfi_fde_data} is used to describe the compact unwind opcodes to be 4767used for the current function. These are emitted inline in the 4768@code{.eh_frame_entry} section if small enough and there is no LSDA, or 4769in the @code{.gnu.extab} section otherwise. 4770Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e. 4771with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}. 4772 4773@subsection @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]} 4774@code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding. 4775@var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA 4776should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), the second 4777argument is not present, otherwise the second argument should be a constant 4778or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff}, 4779meaning that no LSDA is present. 4780 4781@subsection @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} [@var{align}] 4782@code{.cfi_inline_lsda} marks the start of a LSDA data section and 4783switches to the corresponding @code{.gnu.extab} section. 4784Must be preceded by a CFI block containing a @code{.cfi_lsda} directive. 4785Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e. 4786with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}. 4787 4788The table header and unwinding opcodes will be generated at this point, 4789so that they are immediately followed by the LSDA data. The symbol 4790referenced by the @code{.cfi_lsda} directive should still be defined 4791in case a fallback FDE based encoding is used. The LSDA data is terminated 4792by a section directive. 4793 4794The optional @var{align} argument specifies the alignment required. 4795The alignment is specified as a power of two, as with the 4796@code{.p2align} directive. 4797 4798@subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}} 4799@code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take 4800address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}. 4801 4802@subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}} 4803@code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From 4804now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset 4805remains the same. 4806 4807@subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}} 4808@code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register 4809remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the 4810absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute 4811CFA address. 4812 4813@subsection @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}} 4814Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative 4815value that is added/substracted from the previous offset. 4816 4817@subsection @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}} 4818Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from 4819CFA. 4820 4821@subsection @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}} 4822Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from 4823the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset} 4824using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA. 4825This is often easier to use, because the number will match the 4826code it's annotating. 4827 4828@subsection @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}} 4829Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}. 4830 4831@subsection @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}} 4832@code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the 4833same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial 4834instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed. 4835 4836@subsection @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}} 4837From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore. 4838 4839@subsection @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}} 4840Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame, 4841i.e. no restoration needed. 4842 4843@subsection @code{.cfi_remember_state} and @code{.cfi_restore_state} 4844@code{.cfi_remember_state} pushes the set of rules for every register onto an 4845implicit stack, while @code{.cfi_restore_state} pops them off the stack and 4846places them in the current row. This is useful for situations where you have 4847multiple @code{.cfi_*} directives that need to be undone due to the control 4848flow of the program. For example, we could have something like this (assuming 4849the CFA is the value of @code{rbp}): 4850 4851@smallexample 4852 je label 4853 popq %rbx 4854 .cfi_restore %rbx 4855 popq %r12 4856 .cfi_restore %r12 4857 popq %rbp 4858 .cfi_restore %rbp 4859 .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8 4860 ret 4861label: 4862 /* Do something else */ 4863@end smallexample 4864 4865Here, we want the @code{.cfi} directives to affect only the rows corresponding 4866to the instructions before @code{label}. This means we'd have to add multiple 4867@code{.cfi} directives after @code{label} to recreate the original save 4868locations of the registers, as well as setting the CFA back to the value of 4869@code{rbp}. This would be clumsy, and result in a larger binary size. Instead, 4870we can write: 4871 4872@smallexample 4873 je label 4874 popq %rbx 4875 .cfi_remember_state 4876 .cfi_restore %rbx 4877 popq %r12 4878 .cfi_restore %r12 4879 popq %rbp 4880 .cfi_restore %rbp 4881 .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8 4882 ret 4883label: 4884 .cfi_restore_state 4885 /* Do something else */ 4886@end smallexample 4887 4888That way, the rules for the instructions after @code{label} will be the same 4889as before the first @code{.cfi_restore} without having to use multiple 4890@code{.cfi} directives. 4891 4892@subsection @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}} 4893Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either 4894directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}. 4895 4896@subsection @code{.cfi_signal_frame} 4897Mark current function as signal trampoline. 4898 4899@subsection @code{.cfi_window_save} 4900SPARC register window has been saved. 4901 4902@subsection @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}] 4903Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One 4904might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI 4905opcodes that GAS does not yet support. 4906 4907@subsection @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}} 4908The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label} 4909will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the 4910description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding. 4911 4912The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably 4913limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to 4914mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached 4915by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory 4916or another register. 4917 4918@node Comm 4919@section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} } 4920 4921@cindex @code{comm} directive 4922@cindex symbol, common 4923@code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a 4924common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol 4925of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a 4926definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will 4927allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an 4928absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with 4929the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space 4930using the largest size. 4931 4932@ifset COFF-ELF 4933When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes 4934an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol, 4935specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means 4936that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE 4937as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte 4938boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a 4939power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the 4940common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no 4941alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the 4942largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a 4943maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This 4944is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s 4945@samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to 4946multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables. 4947It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object 4948(@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}. 4949@end ifset 4950 4951@ifset HPPA 4952The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is 4953@samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional. 4954@end ifset 4955 4956@node Data 4957@section @code{.data @var{subsection}} 4958 4959@cindex @code{data} directive 4960@code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the 4961end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an 4962absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults 4963to zero. 4964 4965@ifset COFF 4966@node Def 4967@section @code{.def @var{name}} 4968 4969@cindex @code{def} directive 4970@cindex COFF symbols, debugging 4971@cindex debugging COFF symbols 4972Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the 4973definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered. 4974@ifset BOUT 4975 4976This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF 4977format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized, 4978but ignored. 4979@end ifset 4980@end ifset 4981 4982@ifset aout-bout 4983@node Desc 4984@section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}} 4985 4986@cindex @code{desc} directive 4987@cindex COFF symbol descriptor 4988@cindex symbol descriptor, COFF 4989This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}) 4990to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression. 4991 4992@ifset COFF 4993The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is 4994configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out} 4995object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts 4996it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF. 4997@end ifset 4998@end ifset 4999 5000@ifset COFF 5001@node Dim 5002@section @code{.dim} 5003 5004@cindex @code{dim} directive 5005@cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information 5006@cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF 5007This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging 5008information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside 5009@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. 5010@ifset BOUT 5011 5012@samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when 5013@command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but 5014ignores it. 5015@end ifset 5016@end ifset 5017 5018@node Double 5019@section @code{.double @var{flonums}} 5020 5021@cindex @code{double} directive 5022@cindex floating point numbers (double) 5023@code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It 5024assembles floating point numbers. 5025@ifset GENERIC 5026The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how 5027@command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}. 5028@end ifset 5029@ifclear GENERIC 5030@ifset IEEEFLOAT 5031On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers 5032in @sc{ieee} format. 5033@end ifset 5034@end ifclear 5035 5036@node Eject 5037@section @code{.eject} 5038 5039@cindex @code{eject} directive 5040@cindex new page, in listings 5041@cindex page, in listings 5042@cindex listing control: new page 5043Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings. 5044 5045@node Else 5046@section @code{.else} 5047 5048@cindex @code{else} directive 5049@code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional 5050assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section 5051of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if} 5052was false. 5053 5054@node Elseif 5055@section @code{.elseif} 5056 5057@cindex @code{elseif} directive 5058@code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional 5059assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new 5060@code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section. 5061 5062@node End 5063@section @code{.end} 5064 5065@cindex @code{end} directive 5066@code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not 5067process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive. 5068 5069@ifset COFF 5070@node Endef 5071@section @code{.endef} 5072 5073@cindex @code{endef} directive 5074This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with 5075@code{.def}. 5076@ifset BOUT 5077 5078@samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if 5079@command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this 5080directive but ignores it. 5081@end ifset 5082@end ifset 5083 5084@node Endfunc 5085@section @code{.endfunc} 5086@cindex @code{endfunc} directive 5087@code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}. 5088 5089@node Endif 5090@section @code{.endif} 5091 5092@cindex @code{endif} directive 5093@code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly; 5094it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled 5095conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}. 5096 5097@node Equ 5098@section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}} 5099 5100@cindex @code{equ} directive 5101@cindex assigning values to symbols 5102@cindex symbols, assigning values to 5103This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. 5104It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}. 5105 5106@ifset HPPA 5107The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is 5108@samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}. 5109@end ifset 5110 5111@ifset Z80 5112The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is 5113@samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}. 5114On the Z80 it is an eror if @var{symbol} is already defined, 5115but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition. 5116Compare @ref{Equiv}. 5117@end ifset 5118 5119@node Equiv 5120@section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}} 5121@cindex @code{equiv} directive 5122The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that 5123the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a 5124symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be 5125undefined. 5126 5127Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to 5128@smallexample 5129.ifdef SYM 5130.err 5131.endif 5132.equ SYM,VAL 5133@end smallexample 5134plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition. 5135 5136@node Eqv 5137@section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}} 5138@cindex @code{eqv} directive 5139The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to 5140evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time 5141the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current 5142value is taken. 5143 5144@node Err 5145@section @code{.err} 5146@cindex @code{err} directive 5147If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error 5148message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an 5149object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code. 5150 5151@node Error 5152@section @code{.error "@var{string}"} 5153@cindex error directive 5154 5155Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a 5156string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the 5157message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}. 5158@xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}. 5159 5160@smallexample 5161 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested." 5162@end smallexample 5163 5164@node Exitm 5165@section @code{.exitm} 5166Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}. 5167 5168@node Extern 5169@section @code{.extern} 5170 5171@cindex @code{extern} directive 5172@code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility 5173with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats 5174all undefined symbols as external. 5175 5176@node Fail 5177@section @code{.fail @var{expression}} 5178 5179@cindex @code{fail} directive 5180Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500 5181or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less 5182than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will 5183include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside 5184complex nested macros or conditional assembly. 5185 5186@node File 5187@section @code{.file} 5188@cindex @code{file} directive 5189 5190@ifclear no-file-dir 5191There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets 5192that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of 5193@code{.file}. Other targets use the default version. 5194 5195@subheading Default Version 5196 5197@cindex logical file name 5198@cindex file name, logical 5199This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we 5200are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is: 5201 5202@smallexample 5203.file @var{string} 5204@end smallexample 5205 5206@var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is 5207recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish 5208to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This 5209statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with 5210old @command{@value{AS}} programs. 5211 5212@subheading DWARF2 Version 5213@end ifclear 5214 5215When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames 5216to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is: 5217 5218@smallexample 5219.file @var{fileno} @var{filename} 5220@end smallexample 5221 5222The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the 5223index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string 5224literal. 5225 5226The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename 5227table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging 5228information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table 5229entries will have. 5230 5231@node Fill 5232@section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}} 5233 5234@cindex @code{fill} directive 5235@cindex writing patterns in memory 5236@cindex patterns, writing in memory 5237@var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions. 5238This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat} 5239may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is 5240more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with 5241other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes 5242is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are 5243zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the 5244byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for. 5245Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order 5246@var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is 5247compatible with other people's assemblers. 5248 5249@var{size} and @var{value} are optional. 5250If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is 5251assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent, 5252@var{size} is assumed to be 1. 5253 5254@node Float 5255@section @code{.float @var{flonums}} 5256 5257@cindex floating point numbers (single) 5258@cindex @code{float} directive 5259This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It 5260has the same effect as @code{.single}. 5261@ifset GENERIC 5262The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how 5263@command{@value{AS}} is configured. 5264@xref{Machine Dependencies}. 5265@end ifset 5266@ifclear GENERIC 5267@ifset IEEEFLOAT 5268On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers 5269in @sc{ieee} format. 5270@end ifset 5271@end ifclear 5272 5273@node Func 5274@section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]} 5275@cindex @code{func} directive 5276@code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and 5277is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled. 5278Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported. 5279@var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name} 5280prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used. 5281@samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target. 5282All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type. 5283The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}. 5284 5285@node Global 5286@section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}} 5287 5288@cindex @code{global} directive 5289@cindex symbol, making visible to linker 5290@code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define 5291@var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to 5292other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise, 5293@var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name 5294from another file linked into the same program. 5295 5296Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for 5297compatibility with other assemblers. 5298 5299@ifset HPPA 5300On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other 5301partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well. 5302@xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}. 5303@end ifset 5304 5305@ifset ELF 5306@node Gnu_attribute 5307@section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}} 5308Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}. 5309 5310@node Hidden 5311@section @code{.hidden @var{names}} 5312 5313@cindex @code{hidden} directive 5314@cindex visibility 5315This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are 5316@code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and 5317@code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}). 5318 5319This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by 5320their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to 5321@code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components. 5322Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well. 5323@end ifset 5324 5325@node hword 5326@section @code{.hword @var{expressions}} 5327 5328@cindex @code{hword} directive 5329@cindex integers, 16-bit 5330@cindex numbers, 16-bit 5331@cindex sixteen bit integers 5332This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits 5333a 16 bit number for each. 5334 5335@ifset GENERIC 5336This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target 5337architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}. 5338@end ifset 5339@ifclear GENERIC 5340@ifset W32 5341This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}. 5342@end ifset 5343@ifset W16 5344This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}. 5345@end ifset 5346@end ifclear 5347 5348@node Ident 5349@section @code{.ident} 5350 5351@cindex @code{ident} directive 5352 5353This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The 5354behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the 5355a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for 5356source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything 5357for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or 5358@code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are 5359emitted to the @code{.comment} section. 5360 5361@node If 5362@section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}} 5363 5364@cindex conditional assembly 5365@cindex @code{if} directive 5366@code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only 5367considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument 5368(which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of 5369the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif} 5370(@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the 5371alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}). 5372If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid 5373nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block. 5374 5375The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported: 5376@table @code 5377@cindex @code{ifdef} directive 5378@item .ifdef @var{symbol} 5379Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol} 5380has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined 5381is considered to be undefined. 5382 5383@cindex @code{ifb} directive 5384@item .ifb @var{text} 5385Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty). 5386 5387@cindex @code{ifc} directive 5388@item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2} 5389Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The 5390strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted, 5391the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the 5392end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The 5393string comparison is case sensitive. 5394 5395@cindex @code{ifeq} directive 5396@item .ifeq @var{absolute expression} 5397Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero. 5398 5399@cindex @code{ifeqs} directive 5400@item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2} 5401Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes. 5402 5403@cindex @code{ifge} directive 5404@item .ifge @var{absolute expression} 5405Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or 5406equal to zero. 5407 5408@cindex @code{ifgt} directive 5409@item .ifgt @var{absolute expression} 5410Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero. 5411 5412@cindex @code{ifle} directive 5413@item .ifle @var{absolute expression} 5414Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal 5415to zero. 5416 5417@cindex @code{iflt} directive 5418@item .iflt @var{absolute expression} 5419Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero. 5420 5421@cindex @code{ifnb} directive 5422@item .ifnb @var{text} 5423Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the 5424following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty). 5425 5426@cindex @code{ifnc} directive 5427@item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}. 5428Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the 5429following section of code if the two strings are not the same. 5430 5431@cindex @code{ifndef} directive 5432@cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive 5433@item .ifndef @var{symbol} 5434@itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol} 5435Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol} 5436has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol 5437which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined. 5438 5439@cindex @code{ifne} directive 5440@item .ifne @var{absolute expression} 5441Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero 5442(in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}). 5443 5444@cindex @code{ifnes} directive 5445@item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2} 5446Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the 5447following section of code if the two strings are not the same. 5448@end table 5449 5450@node Incbin 5451@section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]} 5452 5453@cindex @code{incbin} directive 5454@cindex binary files, including 5455The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current 5456location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line 5457option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required 5458around @var{file}. 5459 5460The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the 5461@var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to 5462read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's 5463responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and 5464after the @code{incbin} directive. 5465 5466@node Include 5467@section @code{.include "@var{file}"} 5468 5469@cindex @code{include} directive 5470@cindex supporting files, including 5471@cindex files, including 5472This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified 5473points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as 5474if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the 5475included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You 5476can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option 5477(@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required 5478around @var{file}. 5479 5480@node Int 5481@section @code{.int @var{expressions}} 5482 5483@cindex @code{int} directive 5484@cindex integers, 32-bit 5485Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas. 5486For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that 5487expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind 5488of target the assembly is for. 5489 5490@ifclear GENERIC 5491@ifset H8 5492On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit 5493integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits 549432-bit integers. 5495@end ifset 5496@end ifclear 5497 5498@ifset ELF 5499@node Internal 5500@section @code{.internal @var{names}} 5501 5502@cindex @code{internal} directive 5503@cindex visibility 5504This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are 5505@code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and 5506@code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}). 5507 5508This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by 5509their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to 5510@code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden} 5511(i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific 5512processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well. 5513@end ifset 5514 5515@node Irp 5516@section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{} 5517 5518@cindex @code{irp} directive 5519Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}. 5520The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is 5521terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is 5522set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no 5523@var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with 5524@var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the 5525sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}. 5526 5527For example, assembling 5528 5529@example 5530 .irp param,1,2,3 5531 move d\param,sp@@- 5532 .endr 5533@end example 5534 5535is equivalent to assembling 5536 5537@example 5538 move d1,sp@@- 5539 move d2,sp@@- 5540 move d3,sp@@- 5541@end example 5542 5543For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}. 5544 5545@node Irpc 5546@section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{} 5547 5548@cindex @code{irpc} directive 5549Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}. 5550The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is 5551terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value}, 5552@var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is 5553assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is 5554assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to 5555@var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}. 5556 5557For example, assembling 5558 5559@example 5560 .irpc param,123 5561 move d\param,sp@@- 5562 .endr 5563@end example 5564 5565is equivalent to assembling 5566 5567@example 5568 move d1,sp@@- 5569 move d2,sp@@- 5570 move d3,sp@@- 5571@end example 5572 5573For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion 5574at @xref{Macro}. 5575 5576@node Lcomm 5577@section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}} 5578 5579@cindex @code{lcomm} directive 5580@cindex local common symbols 5581@cindex symbols, local common 5582Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common 5583denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are 5584those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss 5585section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol} 5586is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally 5587not visible to @code{@value{LD}}. 5588 5589@ifset GENERIC 5590Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This 5591argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section. 5592@end ifset 5593 5594@ifset HPPA 5595The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is 5596@samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional. 5597@end ifset 5598 5599@node Lflags 5600@section @code{.lflags} 5601 5602@cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored) 5603@command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other 5604assemblers, but ignores it. 5605 5606@ifclear no-line-dir 5607@node Line 5608@section @code{.line @var{line-number}} 5609 5610@cindex @code{line} directive 5611@cindex logical line number 5612@ifset aout-bout 5613Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute 5614expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other 5615statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are 5616reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day 5617@command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only 5618for compatibility with existing assembler programs. 5619@end ifset 5620 5621Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or 5622@code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it 5623when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it 5624were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a 5625@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. 5626 5627Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives 5628used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for 5629debugging. 5630@end ifclear 5631 5632@node Linkonce 5633@section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]} 5634@cindex COMDAT 5635@cindex @code{linkonce} directive 5636@cindex common sections 5637Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it. 5638This may be used to include the same section in several different object files, 5639but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file. 5640The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section. 5641Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be 5642unique. 5643 5644This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this 5645writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable 5646Executable format used on Windows NT. 5647 5648The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the 5649following strings. For example: 5650@smallexample 5651.linkonce same_size 5652@end smallexample 5653Not all types may be supported on all object file formats. 5654 5655@table @code 5656@item discard 5657Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default. 5658 5659@item one_only 5660Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy. 5661 5662@item same_size 5663Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes. 5664 5665@item same_contents 5666Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents. 5667@end table 5668 5669@node List 5670@section @code{.list} 5671 5672@cindex @code{list} directive 5673@cindex listing control, turning on 5674Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or 5675not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an 5676internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the 5677counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are 5678generated whenever the counter is greater than zero. 5679 5680By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the 5681@samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}), 5682the initial value of the listing counter is one. 5683 5684@node Ln 5685@section @code{.ln @var{line-number}} 5686 5687@cindex @code{ln} directive 5688@ifclear no-line-dir 5689@samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}. 5690@end ifclear 5691@ifset no-line-dir 5692Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number} 5693must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical 5694line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a 5695statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical 5696line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. 5697@ifset BOUT 5698 5699This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is 5700configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF 5701output format. 5702@end ifset 5703@end ifset 5704 5705@node Loc 5706@section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]} 5707@cindex @code{loc} directive 5708When emitting DWARF2 line number information, 5709the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line 5710number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly 5711instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column} 5712arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before 5713the row is added. 5714 5715The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order: 5716 5717@table @code 5718@item basic_block 5719This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the 5720@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}. 5721 5722@item prologue_end 5723This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the 5724@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}. 5725 5726@item epilogue_begin 5727This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the 5728@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}. 5729 5730@item is_stmt @var{value} 5731This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the 5732@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be 5733either 0 or 1. 5734 5735@item isa @var{value} 5736This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line} 5737state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer. 5738 5739@item discriminator @var{value} 5740This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line} 5741state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer. 5742 5743@end table 5744 5745@node Loc_mark_labels 5746@section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}} 5747@cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive 5748When emitting DWARF2 line number information, 5749the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry 5750to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block} 5751register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen. 5752The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable 5753this function respectively. 5754 5755@ifset ELF 5756@node Local 5757@section @code{.local @var{names}} 5758 5759@cindex @code{local} directive 5760This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in 5761the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it 5762will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist, 5763they will be created. 5764 5765For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not 5766accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets, 5767the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm} 5768(@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data. 5769@end ifset 5770 5771@node Long 5772@section @code{.long @var{expressions}} 5773 5774@cindex @code{long} directive 5775@code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}. 5776 5777@ignore 5778@c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is 5779@c what it really ought to do 5780@node Lsym 5781@section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}} 5782 5783@cindex @code{lsym} directive 5784@cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly 5785@code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in 5786the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the 5787rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be 5788the same as the expression value: 5789@smallexample 5790@var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0 5791@var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})} 5792@var{value} = @var{expression} 5793@end smallexample 5794@noindent 5795The new symbol is not flagged as external. 5796@end ignore 5797 5798@node Macro 5799@section @code{.macro} 5800 5801@cindex macros 5802The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that 5803generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro 5804@code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory: 5805 5806@example 5807 .macro sum from=0, to=5 5808 .long \from 5809 .if \to-\from 5810 sum "(\from+1)",\to 5811 .endif 5812 .endm 5813@end example 5814 5815@noindent 5816With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input: 5817 5818@example 5819 .long 0 5820 .long 1 5821 .long 2 5822 .long 3 5823 .long 4 5824 .long 5 5825@end example 5826 5827@ftable @code 5828@item .macro @var{macname} 5829@itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{} 5830@cindex @code{macro} directive 5831Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro 5832definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name, 5833separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to 5834indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through 5835@samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments 5836(through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any 5837macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You 5838cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been 5839subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two 5840definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements: 5841 5842@table @code 5843@item .macro comm 5844Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no 5845arguments. 5846 5847@item .macro plus1 p, p1 5848@itemx .macro plus1 p p1 5849Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1}, 5850which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write 5851@samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments. 5852 5853@item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2 5854Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two 5855arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second. 5856After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as 5857@samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to 5858@var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str 5859,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case 5860@samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}). 5861 5862@item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg 5863Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three 5864arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but 5865not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal 5866will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time. 5867 5868When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by 5869position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to 5870@samp{sum to=17, from=9}. 5871 5872@end table 5873 5874Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly 5875as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be 5876occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain 5877characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon 5878(@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the 5879architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final 5880character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter 5881replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole 5882construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this 5883identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example 5884this macro definition: 5885 5886@example 5887 .macro label l 5888\l: 5889 .endm 5890@end example 5891 5892might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label 5893called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the 5894assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised 5895identifier. 5896 5897Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.}) 5898which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So 5899for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a 5900length specifier like this: 5901 5902@example 5903 .macro opcode base length 5904 \base.\length 5905 .endm 5906@end example 5907 5908and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l} 5909instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to 5910interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}. 5911 5912There are several possible ways around this problem: 5913 5914@table @code 5915@item Insert white space 5916If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest 5917solution. eg: 5918 5919@example 5920 .macro label l 5921\l : 5922 .endm 5923@end example 5924 5925@item Use @samp{\()} 5926The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from 5927the following text. eg: 5928 5929@example 5930 .macro opcode base length 5931 \base\().\length 5932 .endm 5933@end example 5934 5935@item Use the alternate macro syntax mode 5936In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be 5937used as a separator. eg: 5938 5939@example 5940 .altmacro 5941 .macro label l 5942l&: 5943 .endm 5944@end example 5945@end table 5946 5947Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops 5948also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp}) 5949and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well. 5950 5951@item .endm 5952@cindex @code{endm} directive 5953Mark the end of a macro definition. 5954 5955@item .exitm 5956@cindex @code{exitm} directive 5957Exit early from the current macro definition. 5958 5959@cindex number of macros executed 5960@cindex macros, count executed 5961@item \@@ 5962@command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has 5963executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your 5964output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}. 5965 5966@item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ] 5967@emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate 5968macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.} 5969@xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}. 5970@end ftable 5971 5972@node MRI 5973@section @code{.mri @var{val}} 5974 5975@cindex @code{mri} directive 5976@cindex MRI mode, temporarily 5977If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If 5978@var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change 5979affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end 5980of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}. 5981 5982@node Noaltmacro 5983@section @code{.noaltmacro} 5984Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}. 5985 5986@node Nolist 5987@section @code{.nolist} 5988 5989@cindex @code{nolist} directive 5990@cindex listing control, turning off 5991Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or 5992not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an 5993internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the 5994counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are 5995generated whenever the counter is greater than zero. 5996 5997@node Octa 5998@section @code{.octa @var{bignums}} 5999 6000@c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others? Or warn? 6001@cindex @code{octa} directive 6002@cindex integer, 16-byte 6003@cindex sixteen byte integer 6004This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each 6005bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer. 6006 6007The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes; 6008hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes. 6009 6010@node Offset 6011@section @code{.offset @var{loc}} 6012 6013@cindex @code{offset} directive 6014Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must 6015be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining 6016symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org} 6017directive. 6018 6019@node Org 6020@section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}} 6021 6022@cindex @code{org} directive 6023@cindex location counter, advancing 6024@cindex advancing location counter 6025@cindex current address, advancing 6026Advance the location counter of the current section to 6027@var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an 6028expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is, 6029you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the 6030wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible 6031with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute, 6032@command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc} 6033is the same as the current subsection. 6034 6035@code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it 6036unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter 6037backwards. 6038 6039@c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific 6040@c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual) 6041@c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91 6042Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc} 6043may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await 6044a chance to share your improved assembler. 6045 6046Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not 6047to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other 6048people's assemblers. 6049 6050When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the 6051intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an 6052absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted, 6053@var{fill} defaults to zero. 6054 6055@node P2align 6056@section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}} 6057 6058@cindex padding the location counter given a power of two 6059@cindex @code{p2align} directive 6060Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular 6061storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the 6062number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after 6063advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location 6064counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a 6065multiple of 8, no change is needed. 6066 6067The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the 6068padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the 6069padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is 6070marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled 6071with no-op instructions. 6072 6073The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present, 6074it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment 6075directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the 6076specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the 6077fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the 6078required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled 6079with no-op instructions when appropriate. 6080 6081@cindex @code{p2alignw} directive 6082@cindex @code{p2alignl} directive 6083The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the 6084@code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill 6085pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the 6086fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw 60872,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be 6088filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon 6089the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is 6090undefined. 6091 6092@ifset ELF 6093@node PopSection 6094@section @code{.popsection} 6095 6096@cindex @code{popsection} directive 6097@cindex Section Stack 6098This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are 6099@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), 6100@code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous} 6101(@pxref{Previous}). 6102 6103This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top 6104section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the 6105stack. 6106@end ifset 6107 6108@ifset ELF 6109@node Previous 6110@section @code{.previous} 6111 6112@cindex @code{previous} directive 6113@cindex Section Stack 6114This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are 6115@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), 6116@code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection} 6117(@pxref{PopSection}). 6118 6119This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently 6120referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple 6121@code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their 6122subsections). For example: 6123 6124@smallexample 6125.section A 6126 .subsection 1 6127 .word 0x1234 6128 .subsection 2 6129 .word 0x5678 6130.previous 6131 .word 0x9abc 6132@end smallexample 6133 6134Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of 6135section A. Whilst: 6136 6137@smallexample 6138.section A 6139.subsection 1 6140 # Now in section A subsection 1 6141 .word 0x1234 6142.section B 6143.subsection 0 6144 # Now in section B subsection 0 6145 .word 0x5678 6146.subsection 1 6147 # Now in section B subsection 1 6148 .word 0x9abc 6149.previous 6150 # Now in section B subsection 0 6151 .word 0xdef0 6152@end smallexample 6153 6154Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of 6155section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B. 6156 6157In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with 6158the top section on the section stack. 6159@end ifset 6160 6161@node Print 6162@section @code{.print @var{string}} 6163 6164@cindex @code{print} directive 6165@command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during 6166assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes. 6167 6168@ifset ELF 6169@node Protected 6170@section @code{.protected @var{names}} 6171 6172@cindex @code{protected} directive 6173@cindex visibility 6174This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are 6175@code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}). 6176 6177This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by 6178their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to 6179@code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the 6180components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that 6181component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt 6182this. 6183@end ifset 6184 6185@node Psize 6186@section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}} 6187 6188@cindex @code{psize} directive 6189@cindex listing control: paper size 6190@cindex paper size, for listings 6191Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the 6192number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings. 6193 6194If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count 6195of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the 6196default width is 200 columns. 6197 6198@command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of 6199lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using 6200@code{.eject}). 6201 6202If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save 6203those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}. 6204 6205@node Purgem 6206@section @code{.purgem @var{name}} 6207 6208@cindex @code{purgem} directive 6209Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be 6210expanded. @xref{Macro}. 6211 6212@ifset ELF 6213@node PushSection 6214@section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]} 6215 6216@cindex @code{pushsection} directive 6217@cindex Section Stack 6218This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are 6219@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), 6220@code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous} 6221(@pxref{Previous}). 6222 6223This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the 6224top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and 6225subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional 6226@code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same 6227as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive. 6228@end ifset 6229 6230@node Quad 6231@section @code{.quad @var{bignums}} 6232 6233@cindex @code{quad} directive 6234@code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For 6235each bignum, it emits 6236@ifclear bignum-16 6237an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a 6238warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum. 6239@cindex eight-byte integer 6240@cindex integer, 8-byte 6241 6242The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes; 6243hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes. 6244@end ifclear 6245@ifset bignum-16 6246a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a 6247warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum. 6248@cindex sixteen-byte integer 6249@cindex integer, 16-byte 6250@end ifset 6251 6252@node Reloc 6253@section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]} 6254 6255@cindex @code{reloc} directive 6256Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value 6257@var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in 6258the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a 6259symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section. 6260@var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an 6261absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL 6262targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the 6263relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the 6264section. 6265 6266@node Rept 6267@section @code{.rept @var{count}} 6268 6269@cindex @code{rept} directive 6270Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next 6271@code{.endr} directive @var{count} times. 6272 6273For example, assembling 6274 6275@example 6276 .rept 3 6277 .long 0 6278 .endr 6279@end example 6280 6281is equivalent to assembling 6282 6283@example 6284 .long 0 6285 .long 0 6286 .long 0 6287@end example 6288 6289@node Sbttl 6290@section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"} 6291 6292@cindex @code{sbttl} directive 6293@cindex subtitles for listings 6294@cindex listing control: subtitle 6295Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the 6296title line) when generating assembly listings. 6297 6298This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if 6299it appears within ten lines of the top of a page. 6300 6301@ifset COFF 6302@node Scl 6303@section @code{.scl @var{class}} 6304 6305@cindex @code{scl} directive 6306@cindex symbol storage class (COFF) 6307@cindex COFF symbol storage class 6308Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be 6309used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag 6310whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further 6311symbolic debugging information. 6312@ifset BOUT 6313 6314The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when 6315configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}} 6316accepts this directive but ignores it. 6317@end ifset 6318@end ifset 6319 6320@ifset COFF-ELF 6321@node Section 6322@section @code{.section @var{name}} 6323 6324@cindex named section 6325Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section 6326named @var{name}. 6327 6328This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily 6329named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even 6330with a standard @code{a.out} section name. 6331 6332@ifset COFF 6333@ifset ELF 6334@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set 6335@subheading COFF Version 6336@end ifset 6337 6338@cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version) 6339For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following 6340ways: 6341 6342@smallexample 6343.section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"] 6344.section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}] 6345@end smallexample 6346 6347If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the 6348section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized: 6349 6350@table @code 6351@item b 6352bss section (uninitialized data) 6353@item n 6354section is not loaded 6355@item w 6356writable section 6357@item d 6358data section 6359@item e 6360exclude section from linking 6361@item r 6362read-only section 6363@item x 6364executable section 6365@item s 6366shared section (meaningful for PE targets) 6367@item a 6368ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version) 6369@item y 6370section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets) 6371@item 0-9 6372single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension) 6373@end table 6374 6375If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If 6376the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be 6377loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes 6378from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it 6379will be as if no flags had been specified at all. 6380 6381If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is 6382taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}). 6383@end ifset 6384 6385@ifset ELF 6386@ifset COFF 6387@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set 6388@subheading ELF Version 6389@end ifset 6390 6391@cindex Section Stack 6392This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are 6393@code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection} 6394(@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and 6395@code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}). 6396 6397@cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version) 6398For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this: 6399 6400@smallexample 6401.section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]] 6402@end smallexample 6403 6404@anchor{Section Name Substitutions} 6405@kindex --sectname-subst 6406@cindex section name substitution 6407If the @samp{--sectname-subst} command-line option is provided, the @var{name} 6408argument may contain a substitution sequence. Only @code{%S} is supported 6409at the moment, and substitutes the current section name. For example: 6410 6411@smallexample 6412.macro exception_code 6413.section %S.exception 6414[exception code here] 6415.previous 6416.endm 6417 6418.text 6419[code] 6420exception_code 6421[...] 6422 6423.section .init 6424[init code] 6425exception_code 6426[...] 6427@end smallexample 6428 6429The two @code{exception_code} invocations above would create the 6430@code{.text.exception} and @code{.init.exception} sections respectively. 6431This is useful e.g. to discriminate between anciliary sections that are 6432tied to setup code to be discarded after use from anciliary sections that 6433need to stay resident without having to define multiple @code{exception_code} 6434macros just for that purpose. 6435 6436The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any 6437combination of the following characters: 6438 6439@table @code 6440@item a 6441section is allocatable 6442@item e 6443section is excluded from executable and shared library. 6444@item w 6445section is writable 6446@item x 6447section is executable 6448@item M 6449section is mergeable 6450@item S 6451section contains zero terminated strings 6452@item G 6453section is a member of a section group 6454@item T 6455section is used for thread-local-storage 6456@item ? 6457section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any 6458@item @code{<number>} 6459a numeric value indicating the bits to be set in the ELF section header's flags 6460field. Note - if one or more of the alphabetic characters described above is 6461also included in the flags field, their bit values will be ORed into the 6462resulting value. 6463@item @code{<target specific>} 6464some targets extend this list with their own flag characters 6465@end table 6466 6467Note - once a section's flags have been set they cannot be changed. There are 6468a few exceptions to this rule however. Processor and application specific 6469flags can be added to an already defined section. The @code{.interp}, 6470@code{.strtab} and @code{.symtab} sections can have the allocate flag 6471(@code{a}) set after they are initially defined, and the @code{.note-GNU-stack} 6472section may have the executable (@code{x}) flag added. 6473 6474The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants: 6475 6476@table @code 6477@item @@progbits 6478section contains data 6479@item @@nobits 6480section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space) 6481@item @@note 6482section contains data which is used by things other than the program 6483@item @@init_array 6484section contains an array of pointers to init functions 6485@item @@fini_array 6486section contains an array of pointers to finish functions 6487@item @@preinit_array 6488section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions 6489@item @@@code{<number>} 6490a numeric value to be set as the ELF section header's type field. 6491@item @@@code{<target specific>} 6492some targets extend this list with their own types 6493@end table 6494 6495Many targets only support the first three section types. The type may be 6496enclosed in double quotes if necessary. 6497 6498Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg 6499ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the 6500@code{%} character. 6501 6502Note - some sections, eg @code{.text} and @code{.data} are considered to be 6503special and have fixed types. Any attempt to declare them with a different 6504type will generate an error from the assembler. 6505 6506If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must 6507be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this: 6508 6509@smallexample 6510.section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize} 6511@end smallexample 6512 6513Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size 6514constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and 6515@code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is 6516@var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with 6517the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an 6518absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string 6519which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus 6520@code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first 6521@code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}. 6522 6523If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must 6524be present along with an additional field like this: 6525 6526@smallexample 6527.section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}] 6528@end smallexample 6529 6530The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this 6531particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain: 6532 6533@table @code 6534@item comdat 6535indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained 6536@item .gnu.linkonce 6537an alias for comdat 6538@end table 6539 6540Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for 6541the Merge flag should come first, like this: 6542 6543@smallexample 6544.section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}] 6545@end smallexample 6546 6547If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the 6548@code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be 6549present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before 6550this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use 6551@code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly. 6552If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect. 6553 6554If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If 6555the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have 6556none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor 6557executable. The section will contain data. 6558 6559For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section} 6560directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler: 6561 6562@smallexample 6563.section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...] 6564@end smallexample 6565 6566Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma 6567separated flags: 6568 6569@table @code 6570@item #alloc 6571section is allocatable 6572@item #write 6573section is writable 6574@item #execinstr 6575section is executable 6576@item #exclude 6577section is excluded from executable and shared library. 6578@item #tls 6579section is used for thread local storage 6580@end table 6581 6582This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the 6583contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for 6584some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives 6585work. 6586@end ifset 6587@end ifset 6588 6589@node Set 6590@section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}} 6591 6592@cindex @code{set} directive 6593@cindex symbol value, setting 6594Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This 6595changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to 6596@var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains 6597flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}). 6598 6599You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly provided that the 6600values given to the symbol are constants. Values that are based on expressions 6601involving other symbols are allowed, but some targets may restrict this to only 6602being done once per assembly. This is because those targets do not set the 6603addresses of symbols at assembly time, but rather delay the assignment until a 6604final link is performed. This allows the linker a chance to change the code in 6605the files, changing the location of, and the relative distance between, various 6606different symbols. 6607 6608If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object 6609file is the last value stored into it. 6610 6611@ifset Z80 6612On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use 6613@samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead. 6614@end ifset 6615 6616@node Short 6617@section @code{.short @var{expressions}} 6618 6619@cindex @code{short} directive 6620@ifset GENERIC 6621@code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}. 6622@xref{Word,,@code{.word}}. 6623 6624In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate 6625numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}. 6626@end ifset 6627@ifclear GENERIC 6628@ifset W16 6629@code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}. 6630@end ifset 6631@ifset W32 6632This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits 6633a 16 bit number for each. 6634@end ifset 6635@end ifclear 6636 6637@node Single 6638@section @code{.single @var{flonums}} 6639 6640@cindex @code{single} directive 6641@cindex floating point numbers (single) 6642This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It 6643has the same effect as @code{.float}. 6644@ifset GENERIC 6645The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how 6646@command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}. 6647@end ifset 6648@ifclear GENERIC 6649@ifset IEEEFLOAT 6650On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point 6651numbers in @sc{ieee} format. 6652@end ifset 6653@end ifclear 6654 6655@ifset COFF-ELF 6656@node Size 6657@section @code{.size} 6658 6659This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol. 6660 6661@ifset COFF 6662@ifset ELF 6663@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set 6664@subheading COFF Version 6665@end ifset 6666 6667@cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version) 6668For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside 6669@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this: 6670 6671@smallexample 6672.size @var{expression} 6673@end smallexample 6674 6675@ifset BOUT 6676@samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when 6677@command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but 6678ignores it. 6679@end ifset 6680@end ifset 6681 6682@ifset ELF 6683@ifset COFF 6684@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set 6685@subheading ELF Version 6686@end ifset 6687 6688@cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version) 6689For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this: 6690 6691@smallexample 6692.size @var{name} , @var{expression} 6693@end smallexample 6694 6695This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}. 6696The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label 6697arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function 6698symbols. 6699@end ifset 6700@end ifset 6701 6702@ifclear no-space-dir 6703@node Skip 6704@section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}} 6705 6706@cindex @code{skip} directive 6707@cindex filling memory 6708This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both 6709@var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and 6710@var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as 6711@samp{.space}. 6712@end ifclear 6713 6714@node Sleb128 6715@section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}} 6716 6717@cindex @code{sleb128} directive 6718@var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a 6719compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF 6720symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}. 6721 6722@ifclear no-space-dir 6723@node Space 6724@section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}} 6725 6726@cindex @code{space} directive 6727@cindex filling memory 6728This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both 6729@var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma 6730and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same 6731as @samp{.skip}. 6732 6733@ifset HPPA 6734@quotation 6735@emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA 6736targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800 6737Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the 6738@code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives}, 6739for a summary. 6740@end quotation 6741@end ifset 6742@end ifclear 6743 6744@ifset have-stabs 6745@node Stab 6746@section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs} 6747 6748@cindex symbolic debuggers, information for 6749@cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives 6750There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}. 6751All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers. 6752The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they 6753cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file. 6754Up to five fields are required: 6755 6756@table @var 6757@item string 6758This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except 6759@samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some 6760debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names 6761using this field. 6762 6763@item type 6764An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of 6765this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}} 6766and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns. 6767 6768@item other 6769An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the 6770low 8 bits of this expression. 6771 6772@item desc 6773An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16 6774bits of this expression. 6775 6776@item value 6777An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value. 6778@end table 6779 6780If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn}, 6781or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created; 6782you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is 6783compatible with earlier assemblers! 6784 6785@table @code 6786@cindex @code{stabd} directive 6787@item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} 6788 6789The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string. 6790It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a 6791null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty 6792strings. 6793 6794The symbol's value is set to the location counter, 6795relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol 6796is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was 6797assembled. 6798 6799@cindex @code{stabn} directive 6800@item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value} 6801The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}. 6802 6803@cindex @code{stabs} directive 6804@item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value} 6805All five fields are specified. 6806@end table 6807@end ifset 6808@c end have-stabs 6809 6810@node String 6811@section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16} 6812"@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}" 6813 6814@cindex string, copying to object file 6815@cindex string8, copying to object file 6816@cindex string16, copying to object file 6817@cindex string32, copying to object file 6818@cindex string64, copying to object file 6819@cindex @code{string} directive 6820@cindex @code{string8} directive 6821@cindex @code{string16} directive 6822@cindex @code{string32} directive 6823@cindex @code{string64} directive 6824 6825Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than 6826one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a 6827particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte. 6828You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}. 6829 6830The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from 6831the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is 6832copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters 6833are stored in target endianness byte order. 6834 6835Example: 6836@smallexample 6837 .string32 "BYE" 6838expands to: 6839 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */ 6840 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */ 6841@end smallexample 6842 6843 6844@node Struct 6845@section @code{.struct @var{expression}} 6846 6847@cindex @code{struct} directive 6848Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression}, 6849which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows: 6850@smallexample 6851 .struct 0 6852field1: 6853 .struct field1 + 4 6854field2: 6855 .struct field2 + 4 6856field3: 6857@end smallexample 6858This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol 6859@code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the 6860value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to 6861use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section 6862before further assembly. 6863 6864@ifset ELF 6865@node SubSection 6866@section @code{.subsection @var{name}} 6867 6868@cindex @code{subsection} directive 6869@cindex Section Stack 6870This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are 6871@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), 6872@code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous} 6873(@pxref{Previous}). 6874 6875This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current 6876section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack 6877in place of the then current top of stack subsection. 6878@end ifset 6879 6880@ifset ELF 6881@node Symver 6882@section @code{.symver} 6883@cindex @code{symver} directive 6884@cindex symbol versioning 6885@cindex versions of symbols 6886Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes 6887within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is 6888typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library. 6889There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound 6890into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a 6891shared library. 6892 6893For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this: 6894@smallexample 6895.symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename} 6896@end smallexample 6897If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file 6898being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol 6899alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we 6900just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't 6901permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name 6902of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name} 6903itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to 6904have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source 6905file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a 6906function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be 6907the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when 6908building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned 6909symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the 6910nodename of the symbol you are trying to override. 6911 6912If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all 6913references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no 6914reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the 6915symbol table. 6916 6917Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is: 6918@smallexample 6919.symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename} 6920@end smallexample 6921In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within 6922the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The 6923difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve 6924references to @var{name2} by the linker. 6925 6926The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is: 6927@smallexample 6928.symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename} 6929@end smallexample 6930When @var{name} is not defined within the 6931file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When 6932@var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol 6933name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}. 6934@end ifset 6935 6936@ifset COFF 6937@node Tag 6938@section @code{.tag @var{structname}} 6939 6940@cindex COFF structure debugging 6941@cindex structure debugging, COFF 6942@cindex @code{tag} directive 6943This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging 6944information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside 6945@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure 6946definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures. 6947@ifset BOUT 6948 6949@samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when 6950@command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but 6951ignores it. 6952@end ifset 6953@end ifset 6954 6955@node Text 6956@section @code{.text @var{subsection}} 6957 6958@cindex @code{text} directive 6959Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of 6960the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute 6961expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero 6962is used. 6963 6964@node Title 6965@section @code{.title "@var{heading}"} 6966 6967@cindex @code{title} directive 6968@cindex listing control: title line 6969Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the 6970source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings. 6971 6972This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if 6973it appears within ten lines of the top of a page. 6974 6975@ifset COFF-ELF 6976@node Type 6977@section @code{.type} 6978 6979This directive is used to set the type of a symbol. 6980 6981@ifset COFF 6982@ifset ELF 6983@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set 6984@subheading COFF Version 6985@end ifset 6986 6987@cindex COFF symbol type 6988@cindex symbol type, COFF 6989@cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version) 6990For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within 6991@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this: 6992 6993@smallexample 6994.type @var{int} 6995@end smallexample 6996 6997This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table 6998entry. 6999 7000@ifset BOUT 7001@samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when 7002@command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this 7003directive but ignores it. 7004@end ifset 7005@end ifset 7006 7007@ifset ELF 7008@ifset COFF 7009@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set 7010@subheading ELF Version 7011@end ifset 7012 7013@cindex ELF symbol type 7014@cindex symbol type, ELF 7015@cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version) 7016For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this: 7017 7018@smallexample 7019.type @var{name} , @var{type description} 7020@end smallexample 7021 7022This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a 7023function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes 7024supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide 7025compatibility with various other assemblers. 7026 7027Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and 7028@samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes 7029below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by 7030the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for 7031maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other 7032assemblers. 7033 7034The syntaxes supported are: 7035 7036@smallexample 7037 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE> 7038 .type <name>,#<type> 7039 .type <name>,@@<type> 7040 .type <name>,%<type> 7041 .type <name>,"<type>" 7042@end smallexample 7043 7044The types supported are: 7045 7046@table @gcctabopt 7047@item STT_FUNC 7048@itemx function 7049Mark the symbol as being a function name. 7050 7051@item STT_GNU_IFUNC 7052@itemx gnu_indirect_function 7053Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc 7054processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems). 7055 7056@item STT_OBJECT 7057@itemx object 7058Mark the symbol as being a data object. 7059 7060@item STT_TLS 7061@itemx tls_object 7062Mark the symbol as being a thead-local data object. 7063 7064@item STT_COMMON 7065@itemx common 7066Mark the symbol as being a common data object. 7067 7068@item STT_NOTYPE 7069@itemx notype 7070Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness. 7071 7072@item gnu_unique_object 7073Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker 7074will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this 7075name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU 7076systems). 7077 7078@end table 7079 7080Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above. 7081 7082@end ifset 7083@end ifset 7084 7085@node Uleb128 7086@section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}} 7087 7088@cindex @code{uleb128} directive 7089@var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a 7090compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF 7091symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}. 7092 7093@ifset COFF 7094@node Val 7095@section @code{.val @var{addr}} 7096 7097@cindex @code{val} directive 7098@cindex COFF value attribute 7099@cindex value attribute, COFF 7100This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs, 7101records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table 7102entry. 7103@ifset BOUT 7104 7105@samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is 7106configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it. 7107@end ifset 7108@end ifset 7109 7110@ifset ELF 7111@node Version 7112@section @code{.version "@var{string}"} 7113 7114@cindex @code{version} directive 7115This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF 7116formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}. 7117@end ifset 7118 7119@ifset ELF 7120@node VTableEntry 7121@section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}} 7122 7123@cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive 7124This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a 7125@code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}. 7126 7127@node VTableInherit 7128@section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}} 7129 7130@cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive 7131This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol 7132@code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the 7133parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the 7134parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section. 7135@end ifset 7136 7137@node Warning 7138@section @code{.warning "@var{string}"} 7139@cindex warning directive 7140Similar to the directive @code{.error} 7141(@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning. 7142 7143@node Weak 7144@section @code{.weak @var{names}} 7145 7146@cindex @code{weak} directive 7147This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol 7148@code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created. 7149 7150On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This 7151directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol 7152@code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created. 7153 7154On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases. 7155When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an 7156alternate symbol to hold the default value. 7157 7158@node Weakref 7159@section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}} 7160 7161@cindex @code{weakref} directive 7162This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to 7163be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak. 7164If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol 7165will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the 7166symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table. 7167 7168The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate 7169assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the 7170symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files 7171resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that 7172had the references to the alias removed. 7173 7174The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled 7175within the assembler. 7176 7177@node Word 7178@section @code{.word @var{expressions}} 7179 7180@cindex @code{word} directive 7181This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, 7182separated by commas. 7183@ifclear GENERIC 7184@ifset W32 7185For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number. 7186@end ifset 7187@ifset W16 7188For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number. 7189@end ifset 7190@end ifclear 7191@ifset GENERIC 7192 7193The size of the number emitted, and its byte order, 7194depend on what target computer the assembly is for. 7195@end ifset 7196 7197@c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't 7198@c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps. 7199@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE 7200@cindex difference tables altered 7201@cindex altered difference tables 7202@quotation 7203@emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers} 7204@end quotation 7205 7206@ifset GENERIC 7207Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit 7208addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of 7209interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it; 7210@pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue. 7211 7212@end ifset 7213In order to assemble compiler output into something that works, 7214@command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives. 7215Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by 7216compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a 7217directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between 7218@code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}} 7219creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label. 7220This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the 7221first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow 7222of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the 7223table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word} 7224contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to 7225@code{sym2}. 7226 7227If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the 7228secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a 7229@samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a 7230long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table, 7231and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3} 7232minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many 7233entries in the original jump table as necessary. 7234 7235@ifset INTERNALS 7236@emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the 7237@samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse 7238assembly language programmers. 7239@end ifset 7240@end ifset 7241@c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE 7242 7243@ifclear no-space-dir 7244@node Zero 7245@section @code{.zero @var{size}} 7246 7247@cindex @code{zero} directive 7248@cindex filling memory with zero bytes 7249This directive emits @var{size} 0-valued bytes. @var{size} must be an absolute 7250expression. This directive is actually an alias for the @samp{.skip} directive 7251so in can take an optional second argument of the value to store in the bytes 7252instead of zero. Using @samp{.zero} in this way would be confusing however. 7253@end ifclear 7254 7255@node Deprecated 7256@section Deprecated Directives 7257 7258@cindex deprecated directives 7259@cindex obsolescent directives 7260One day these directives won't work. 7261They are included for compatibility with older assemblers. 7262@table @t 7263@item .abort 7264@item .line 7265@end table 7266 7267@ifset ELF 7268@node Object Attributes 7269@chapter Object Attributes 7270@cindex object attributes 7271 7272@command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture 7273into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike. 7274Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating 7275point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file 7276requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be 7277passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no 7278hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different 7279generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the 7280newer generation at run-time. 7281 7282This information is useful during and after linking. At link time, 7283@command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link 7284time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file 7285correctly. 7286 7287Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each 7288attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a 7289string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer, 7290and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string 7291or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing 7292attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value. 7293 7294Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture. 7295The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}. 7296 7297@menu 7298* GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes 7299* Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes 7300@end menu 7301 7302@node GNU Object Attributes 7303@section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes 7304 7305The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute 7306with vendor @samp{gnu}. 7307 7308Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for 7309its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and 7310an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} & 73112} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for 7312architecture-dependent ones. 7313 7314@subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes 7315 7316These attributes are valid on all architectures. 7317 7318@table @r 7319@item Tag_compatibility (32) 7320The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If 7321the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1, 7322then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater 7323than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private 7324arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name. 7325@end table 7326 7327@subsection MIPS Attributes 7328 7329@table @r 7330@item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4) 7331The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be: 7332 7333@itemize @bullet 7334@item 73350 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI. 7336@item 73371 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a standard 7338double-precision FPU. 7339@item 73402 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU. 7341@item 73423 for files using the software floating-point ABI. 7343@item 73444 for files using the deprecated hardware floating-point ABI which used 64-bit 7345floating-point registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and increased the 7346number of callee-saved floating-point registers. 7347@item 73485 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a double-precision FPU 7349with either 32-bit or 64-bit floating-point registers and 32-bit 7350general-purpose registers. 7351@item 73526 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point 7353registers and 32-bit general-purpose registers. 7354@item 73557 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point 7356registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and a rule that forbids the 7357direct use of odd-numbered single-precision floating-point registers. 7358@end itemize 7359@end table 7360 7361@subsection PowerPC Attributes 7362 7363@table @r 7364@item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4) 7365The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be: 7366 7367@itemize @bullet 7368@item 73690 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI. 7370@item 73711 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI. 7372@item 73732 for files using the software floating-point ABI. 7374@item 73753 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI. 7376@end itemize 7377 7378@item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8) 7379The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be: 7380 7381@itemize @bullet 7382@item 73830 for files not affected by the vector ABI. 7384@item 73851 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors. 7386@item 73872 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors. 7388@item 73893 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors. 7390@end itemize 7391@end table 7392 7393@subsection IBM z Systems Attributes 7394 7395@table @r 7396@item Tag_GNU_S390_ABI_Vector (8) 7397The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be: 7398 7399@itemize @bullet 7400@item 74010 for files not affected by the vector ABI. 7402@item 74031 for files using software vector ABI. 7404@item 74052 for files using hardware vector ABI. 7406@end itemize 7407@end table 7408 7409@node Defining New Object Attributes 7410@section Defining New Object Attributes 7411 7412If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you 7413will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils} 7414mailing list. 7415 7416@itemize @bullet 7417@item 7418This manual, which is the official register of attributes. 7419@item 7420The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag. 7421@item 7422The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute 7423and issue any appropriate link warnings. 7424@item 7425Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings. 7426@item 7427@file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute. 7428@item 7429GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically. 7430@end itemize 7431 7432@end ifset 7433 7434@ifset GENERIC 7435@node Machine Dependencies 7436@chapter Machine Dependent Features 7437 7438@cindex machine dependencies 7439The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on 7440each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations 7441vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional 7442directives or command-line options for compatibility with other 7443assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of 7444@command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch 7445optimization. 7446 7447This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not 7448include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that 7449subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual. 7450 7451@menu 7452@ifset AARCH64 7453* AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features 7454@end ifset 7455@ifset ALPHA 7456* Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features 7457@end ifset 7458@ifset ARC 7459* ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features 7460@end ifset 7461@ifset ARM 7462* ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features 7463@end ifset 7464@ifset AVR 7465* AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features 7466@end ifset 7467@ifset Blackfin 7468* Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features 7469@end ifset 7470@ifset CR16 7471* CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features 7472@end ifset 7473@ifset CRIS 7474* CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features 7475@end ifset 7476@ifset D10V 7477* D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features 7478@end ifset 7479@ifset D30V 7480* D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features 7481@end ifset 7482@ifset EPIPHANY 7483* Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features 7484@end ifset 7485@ifset H8/300 7486* H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features 7487@end ifset 7488@ifset HPPA 7489* HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features 7490@end ifset 7491@ifset I370 7492* ESA/390-Dependent:: IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features 7493@end ifset 7494@ifset I80386 7495* i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features 7496@end ifset 7497@ifset I860 7498* i860-Dependent:: Intel 80860 Dependent Features 7499@end ifset 7500@ifset I960 7501* i960-Dependent:: Intel 80960 Dependent Features 7502@end ifset 7503@ifset IA64 7504* IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features 7505@end ifset 7506@ifset IP2K 7507* IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features 7508@end ifset 7509@ifset LM32 7510* LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features 7511@end ifset 7512@ifset M32C 7513* M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features 7514@end ifset 7515@ifset M32R 7516* M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features 7517@end ifset 7518@ifset M680X0 7519* M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features 7520@end ifset 7521@ifset M68HC11 7522* M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features 7523@end ifset 7524@ifset METAG 7525* Meta-Dependent :: Meta Dependent Features 7526@end ifset 7527@ifset MICROBLAZE 7528* MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features 7529@end ifset 7530@ifset MIPS 7531* MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features 7532@end ifset 7533@ifset MMIX 7534* MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features 7535@end ifset 7536@ifset MSP430 7537* MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features 7538@end ifset 7539@ifset NDS32 7540* NDS32-Dependent:: Andes NDS32 Dependent Features 7541@end ifset 7542@ifset NIOSII 7543* NiosII-Dependent:: Altera Nios II Dependent Features 7544@end ifset 7545@ifset NS32K 7546* NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features 7547@end ifset 7548@ifset PDP11 7549* PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features 7550@end ifset 7551@ifset PJ 7552* PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features 7553@end ifset 7554@ifset PPC 7555* PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features 7556@end ifset 7557@ifset RL78 7558* RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features 7559@end ifset 7560@ifset RX 7561* RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features 7562@end ifset 7563@ifset S390 7564* S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features 7565@end ifset 7566@ifset SCORE 7567* SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features 7568@end ifset 7569@ifset SH 7570* SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features 7571* SH64-Dependent:: SuperH SH64 Dependent Features 7572@end ifset 7573@ifset SPARC 7574* Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features 7575@end ifset 7576@ifset TIC54X 7577* TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features 7578@end ifset 7579@ifset TIC6X 7580* TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features 7581@end ifset 7582@ifset TILEGX 7583* TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features 7584@end ifset 7585@ifset TILEPRO 7586* TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features 7587@end ifset 7588@ifset V850 7589* V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features 7590@end ifset 7591@ifset VAX 7592* Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features 7593@end ifset 7594@ifset VISIUM 7595* Visium-Dependent:: Visium Dependent Features 7596@end ifset 7597@ifset XGATE 7598* XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Features 7599@end ifset 7600@ifset XSTORMY16 7601* XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features 7602@end ifset 7603@ifset XTENSA 7604* Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features 7605@end ifset 7606@ifset Z80 7607* Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features 7608@end ifset 7609@ifset Z8000 7610* Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features 7611@end ifset 7612@end menu 7613 7614@lowersections 7615@end ifset 7616 7617@c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters* 7618@c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a 7619@c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called 7620@c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each 7621@c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of 7622@c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH 7623@c in both conditional blocks. 7624 7625@ifset AARCH64 7626@include c-aarch64.texi 7627@end ifset 7628 7629@ifset ALPHA 7630@include c-alpha.texi 7631@end ifset 7632 7633@ifset ARC 7634@include c-arc.texi 7635@end ifset 7636 7637@ifset ARM 7638@include c-arm.texi 7639@end ifset 7640 7641@ifset AVR 7642@include c-avr.texi 7643@end ifset 7644 7645@ifset Blackfin 7646@include c-bfin.texi 7647@end ifset 7648 7649@ifset CR16 7650@include c-cr16.texi 7651@end ifset 7652 7653@ifset CRIS 7654@include c-cris.texi 7655@end ifset 7656 7657@ifset Renesas-all 7658@ifclear GENERIC 7659@node Machine Dependencies 7660@chapter Machine Dependent Features 7661 7662The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family, 7663and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This 7664chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each 7665family. 7666 7667@menu 7668* H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features 7669* SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features 7670@end menu 7671@lowersections 7672@end ifclear 7673@end ifset 7674 7675@ifset D10V 7676@include c-d10v.texi 7677@end ifset 7678 7679@ifset D30V 7680@include c-d30v.texi 7681@end ifset 7682 7683@ifset EPIPHANY 7684@include c-epiphany.texi 7685@end ifset 7686 7687@ifset H8/300 7688@include c-h8300.texi 7689@end ifset 7690 7691@ifset HPPA 7692@include c-hppa.texi 7693@end ifset 7694 7695@ifset I370 7696@include c-i370.texi 7697@end ifset 7698 7699@ifset I80386 7700@include c-i386.texi 7701@end ifset 7702 7703@ifset I860 7704@include c-i860.texi 7705@end ifset 7706 7707@ifset I960 7708@include c-i960.texi 7709@end ifset 7710 7711@ifset IA64 7712@include c-ia64.texi 7713@end ifset 7714 7715@ifset IP2K 7716@include c-ip2k.texi 7717@end ifset 7718 7719@ifset LM32 7720@include c-lm32.texi 7721@end ifset 7722 7723@ifset M32C 7724@include c-m32c.texi 7725@end ifset 7726 7727@ifset M32R 7728@include c-m32r.texi 7729@end ifset 7730 7731@ifset M680X0 7732@include c-m68k.texi 7733@end ifset 7734 7735@ifset M68HC11 7736@include c-m68hc11.texi 7737@end ifset 7738 7739@ifset METAG 7740@include c-metag.texi 7741@end ifset 7742 7743@ifset MICROBLAZE 7744@include c-microblaze.texi 7745@end ifset 7746 7747@ifset MIPS 7748@include c-mips.texi 7749@end ifset 7750 7751@ifset MMIX 7752@include c-mmix.texi 7753@end ifset 7754 7755@ifset MSP430 7756@include c-msp430.texi 7757@end ifset 7758 7759@ifset NDS32 7760@include c-nds32.texi 7761@end ifset 7762 7763@ifset NIOSII 7764@include c-nios2.texi 7765@end ifset 7766 7767@ifset NS32K 7768@include c-ns32k.texi 7769@end ifset 7770 7771@ifset PDP11 7772@include c-pdp11.texi 7773@end ifset 7774 7775@ifset PJ 7776@include c-pj.texi 7777@end ifset 7778 7779@ifset PPC 7780@include c-ppc.texi 7781@end ifset 7782 7783@ifset RL78 7784@include c-rl78.texi 7785@end ifset 7786 7787@ifset RX 7788@include c-rx.texi 7789@end ifset 7790 7791@ifset S390 7792@include c-s390.texi 7793@end ifset 7794 7795@ifset SCORE 7796@include c-score.texi 7797@end ifset 7798 7799@ifset SH 7800@include c-sh.texi 7801@include c-sh64.texi 7802@end ifset 7803 7804@ifset SPARC 7805@include c-sparc.texi 7806@end ifset 7807 7808@ifset TIC54X 7809@include c-tic54x.texi 7810@end ifset 7811 7812@ifset TIC6X 7813@include c-tic6x.texi 7814@end ifset 7815 7816@ifset TILEGX 7817@include c-tilegx.texi 7818@end ifset 7819 7820@ifset TILEPRO 7821@include c-tilepro.texi 7822@end ifset 7823 7824@ifset V850 7825@include c-v850.texi 7826@end ifset 7827 7828@ifset VAX 7829@include c-vax.texi 7830@end ifset 7831 7832@ifset VISIUM 7833@include c-visium.texi 7834@end ifset 7835 7836@ifset XGATE 7837@include c-xgate.texi 7838@end ifset 7839 7840@ifset XSTORMY16 7841@include c-xstormy16.texi 7842@end ifset 7843 7844@ifset XTENSA 7845@include c-xtensa.texi 7846@end ifset 7847 7848@ifset Z80 7849@include c-z80.texi 7850@end ifset 7851 7852@ifset Z8000 7853@include c-z8k.texi 7854@end ifset 7855 7856@ifset GENERIC 7857@c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter 7858@raisesections 7859@end ifset 7860 7861@node Reporting Bugs 7862@chapter Reporting Bugs 7863@cindex bugs in assembler 7864@cindex reporting bugs in assembler 7865 7866Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable. 7867 7868Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may 7869not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the 7870entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better. 7871Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}. 7872 7873In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the 7874information that enables us to fix the bug. 7875 7876@menu 7877* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug? 7878* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs 7879@end menu 7880 7881@node Bug Criteria 7882@section Have You Found a Bug? 7883@cindex bug criteria 7884 7885If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines: 7886 7887@itemize @bullet 7888@cindex fatal signal 7889@cindex assembler crash 7890@cindex crash of assembler 7891@item 7892If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a 7893@command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash. 7894 7895@cindex error on valid input 7896@item 7897If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug. 7898 7899@cindex invalid input 7900@item 7901If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that 7902is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might 7903be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''. 7904 7905@item 7906If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement 7907of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case. 7908@end itemize 7909 7910@node Bug Reporting 7911@section How to Report Bugs 7912@cindex bug reports 7913@cindex assembler bugs, reporting 7914 7915A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If 7916you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you 7917contact that organization first. 7918 7919You can find contact information for many support companies and 7920individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs 7921distribution. 7922 7923@ifset BUGURL 7924In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}} 7925to @value{BUGURL}. 7926@end ifset 7927 7928The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this: 7929@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a 7930fact or leave it out, state it! 7931 7932Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem 7933and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the 7934name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does 7935not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which 7936happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory; 7937perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool 7938the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and 7939give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do, 7940and the most helpful. 7941 7942Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if 7943it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption 7944that the bug has not been reported previously. 7945 7946Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a 7947bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We 7948respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate. 7949You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with. 7950 7951To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things: 7952 7953@itemize @bullet 7954@item 7955The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start 7956it with the @samp{--version} argument. 7957 7958Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for 7959the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}. 7960 7961@item 7962Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source. 7963 7964@item 7965The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and 7966version number. 7967 7968@item 7969What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g. 7970``@code{gcc-2.7}''. 7971 7972@item 7973The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and 7974observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them 7975all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient. 7976 7977If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong 7978and then we might not encounter the bug. 7979 7980@item 7981A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when 7982the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the 7983high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source 7984when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use 7985the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a 7986file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how 7987@command{@value{AS}} is being run. 7988 7989@item 7990A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is 7991incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.'' 7992 7993Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we 7994will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not 7995notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to 7996make a mistake. 7997 7998Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so 7999explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of 8000@command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C 8001library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours 8002would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we 8003would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to 8004expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our 8005observations. 8006 8007@item 8008If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context 8009diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p} 8010option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even 8011discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not 8012by line number. 8013 8014The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your 8015sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us. 8016@end itemize 8017 8018Here are some things that are not necessary: 8019 8020@itemize @bullet 8021@item 8022A description of the envelope of the bug. 8023 8024Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating 8025which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which 8026changes will not affect it. 8027 8028This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we 8029will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger 8030with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples. 8031We recommend that you save your time for something else. 8032 8033Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead} 8034of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the 8035output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take 8036less time, and so on. 8037 8038However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this, 8039report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used. 8040 8041@item 8042A patch for the bug. 8043 8044A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit 8045the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that 8046a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide 8047to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all. 8048 8049Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to 8050construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through 8051the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct 8052one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed. 8053 8054And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your 8055patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will 8056help us to understand. 8057 8058@item 8059A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on. 8060 8061Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such 8062things without first using the debugger to find the facts. 8063@end itemize 8064 8065@node Acknowledgements 8066@chapter Acknowledgements 8067 8068If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here, 8069it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the 8070maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently 8071@c (October 2012), 8072the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}). 8073 8074Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any 8075more details?} 8076 8077Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug 8078information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and 8079extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}. 8080 8081K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and 8082many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS 8083up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite, 8084testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration 8085including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits 8086and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added 8087support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF 8088port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode 8089file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know'' 8090assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint. 8091 8092Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code 8093in format-specific I/O modules. 8094 8095The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale 8096has done much work with it since. 8097 8098The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus. 8099 8100Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support. 8101 8102The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo 8103University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science. 8104 8105Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end 8106(@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support 8107(which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to 8108support a.out format. 8109 8110Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k, 8111tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by 8112Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to 8113use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k 8114targets. 8115 8116John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and 8117simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He 8118updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced 8119fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions 8120remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested 8121cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and 8122required the proverbial one-bit fix. 8123 8124Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the 812568k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix), 8126added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and 8127PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches. 8128 8129Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings. 8130 8131Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300. 8132 8133Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM) 8134along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object 8135formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at 8136the University of Utah and Cygnus Support. 8137 8138Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus 8139Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and 8140Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open 8141Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc, 8142and some initial 64-bit support). 8143 8144Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture. 8145 8146Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD 8147support for openVMS/Alpha. 8148 8149Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic* 8150flavors. 8151 8152David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica, 8153Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors. 8154 8155Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and 8156configuration enhancements. 8157 8158Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture. 8159 8160Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If 8161you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and 8162want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not 8163intentionally leaving anyone out. 8164 8165@node GNU Free Documentation License 8166@appendix GNU Free Documentation License 8167@include fdl.texi 8168 8169@node AS Index 8170@unnumbered AS Index 8171 8172@printindex cp 8173 8174@bye 8175@c Local Variables: 8176@c fill-column: 79 8177@c End: 8178